for 2020 - pg-3- physical chemistry · web view2020/08/03 · for 2020 - pg-3- physical chemistry...
TRANSCRIPT
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY -IIIFOR PG
( MADRAS UNIVERSITY )
Unit I: Thermodynamics - I:-
Unit II: Spectroscopy - II:-
Rotational spectroscopy.
Vibrational spectra
Raman spectra:.
Unit III: Spectroscopy - III:-
Resonance spectroscopy-
ESR
Mass spectra
Mossbauer spectroscopy
Quadrupole interactions
Unit IV: Electrochemistry of solution
Unit V: Quantum Chemistry – IV
BY
Dr. C.SEBASTIAN ANTONY SELVAN
ASST. PROFESSOR OF CHEMISTRY
R. V. GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE
CHENGALPATTU
9444040115
SEP- 2019
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 1
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Long live scientist Doberiner And his Law of Triads too
Long live Scientist Newland And his Law of Octaves too -2
1. Lithium Sodium PotassiumRubidium Cesium Francium -2Which are first A group metals-2They are known as Alkali metals-2( long)
2. Beryllium Magnesium CalciumStrontium Barium Radium -2Which are second A group metals -2They are known as Alkaline earths -2( long)
3. Boron belongs to third A groupAluminium Gallium Indium Thalium -2Are the members of Boron family -2They form first group of p- block elements-2(long)
4.Carbon Silicon GermaniumStannum Plumbum form fourth A group-2Fourth B consists of three metals-2 Titanium Zirconium Hafnium – 2( long)
5. Phosphorous Arsenic Antimony Bismuth Belong to fifth A Nitrogen family – 2Sulphur Selenium Tellurium Polonium – 2 Belong to sixth A Oxygen family-2( long)
6. Fluorine Chlorine Bromine IodineAstatine are the five halogens-2They do belong to seventh A group-2They form salt with strong bases.-2( long)
7. Helium Neon Argon Krypton Xenon Radon are the rare gases-2They are known as noble gases -2Which are basically inert nature-2( long)
8.Elements forming colour compounds All are found in d- block series-2Scandium is the first member-2Yttrium forms the first of second row -2( long)
9 Vanadium Niobium Tantalum
Chromium Molybdenum hard Tungsten-2Manganese Technecium Rhenium-2Are the essential d- block elements-2(long)
10.Eight group consists of nine metals Which are Ferric Iron Cobalt Nickel – 2Ruthenium Rhodium Palladium-2Osmium Iridium Platinum-2( long)
11.Copper Silver Gold are theSo called essential coinage metals-2Zinc Cadmium Mercury are their neighbours-2They do belong to transition elements-2 ( long)
12.Elements following Lanthanum All but fourteen are Lanthanides-2Cerium Prasodium Neodymium-2Are the first three lanthanides - 2( long)
13.Promithyum Samarium EuropiumGadalonium Terbium Dysprocium-2Holmium Erbium Thulium Yutterbium – 2Luetecium are the rest of lanthanides-2. ( long)
14.Actinides are also fourteen numbersWhich are following element Actinium – 2Thorium Protactinium Uranium -2Are the first three actinides- 2 ( long)
15.Neptunium Plutonium AmericiumCurium Berkelium Californium -2Einsteinium Fermium Mendelevium-2Nobelium Lawrencium are the actinides-2 ( long)
16. Rutherfordium Dubnium SeaborgiumBohrium Hassium Meitnerium - 2Darmastidium Roentgenium Copernicium - 2Are the newly found d - block elements
17. Hydrogen resembles alkali metals
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 2
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Halogens also same as hydrogenSo we are in need of your help in Predicting the position of Hydrogen
Composed by: Dr. C.SEBASTIAN A NTONY SELVAN. ASST. PROF in CHEMISTRY, R.V GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE, CHENGALPATTU , MOB: 9444040115 . OCT - 2017
tho;f mwpQh; Nlhghpdh;mthpd; Kk;ik tpjp tho;f
tho;f mwpQh; epa+yz;l; 2mthpd; vz;ik tpjp tho;f
1.ypj;jpak; Nrhbak; nghl;lhrpak;Ugpbak; rPrpak; ‡g;uhd;rpak; - 2,itfNs fhu cNyhfq;fs; - 2,itfNs njhFjp xd;W jdpkq;fs; - 2 (th)
2. nghpypak; nkf;dPrpak; fhy;rpak;];l;uhd;rpak; Nghpak; Nubak; - 2,itfNs fhukz; cNyhfq;fs; - 2njhFjp ,uzL; jdpkqfs; ,itNaahk; -2 (th)
3. Nghuhd; %d;whk; njhFjp mNyhfk;mYkpdpak; fhypak; ,d;bak; jhypak; - 2,itfNs Nghuhd; njhFjp cWg;Gfs; - 2mNyhfjjpd;Kjy; njhFjp ,itNaahk; - 2 (th)
4. fhh;gd; rpypfhd; n[h;khdpak;nts;sPak; fhhpak; ehd;fhk; njhFjp - 2ill;lhdpak; rph;Nfhdpak; `h‡g;dpak; - 2,itAk; ehd;fhk; njhFjp gphpNtahk; - 2 (th)
5. gh];gu]; Mh;rdpf; Mz;bkzp - gp];kj;,itNa iel;u[d; njhFjp jdpkq;fs; - 2Ry;gh; nrypdpak; nlyY}hpak; nghNyhdpak; - 2,itNa Mf;]p[d; njhFjp jdpkq;fs; - 2 (th)
6. g;@hpd; FNshhpd; GNuhkpd; mNahbd;m];lhbd; njhFjp VO jdpkq;fs; -2fhuj;Jld; tpidgl;L cg;ig jUtjhy; - 2,itfspd; kWngah; cg;gPdpfs; - 2 (th)
7. `Pypak; epahd; Mh;fhd; fphpg;lhd; nrdhd;Nulhd; vd;git ke;j thAf;fs; - 2mhpa thAf;fSk; ,itfNs - 2G+[;ak; ,itfspd; njhFjp vz;zhk; - 2 (th)
8. tdbak; epNahgpak; ld;lhyk;FNuhkpak; khypg;bdk; fbd lq;];ld; - 2khq;fdPR nlf;dprpak; hPdpak; - 2,itAk; d- njhFjp jdpkq;fshk; - 2 (th)
9. vl;lhk; njhFjp jdpkq;fs;,itNa ,Uk;G Nfhghy;l; epf;fy; - 2Uj;njdpak; Nuhbak; gybak; - 2M];kpak; ,Ubak; g;shl;bdk; - 2 (th)
10. jhkpuk; nts;sp NkYk; jq;fk;,itNa ehzaq;fis cUthf;Fk; - 2Jj;jehfk; fhl;kpak; ghjurk; - 2d- njhFjp ,jdpy; KbTWk; - 2 (th)
11. epwkhd Nrh;kq;fis cUthf;Fk;jdpkq;fs; d- njhFjp jdpkq;fNs - 2];fhz;bak; ,tw;wpd; Kjy; cWg;G - 2,uz;lhk; njhlh; Muk;gk; <l;hpakhk; - 2 (th)
12. yhe;jdj;ij mLj;j gjpdhd;Fjdpkq;fs; ,itNa yhe;jidLfs; - 2rPhpak; g;uNrhbak; epNahbak; - 2,itNa Kjy; %d;W yhe;jidLfs; - 2 (th)
13. GNuhkpj;jpak; rkhhpak; <Nuhg;gpak;fNlhypdpak; nlh;gpak; b];GNuhrpak; - 2N`hy;kpak; vh;gpak; J}ypak; Al;lh;gpak; - 2Y}l;lrpak; vd;git kw;w yhe;jidL - 2 (th)
14. mf;bdpaj;ij mLj;j gjpdhd;Fjdpkq;fs; ,itNa mf;bidLfs; - 2Njhhpak; GNuhl;lhf;bdpak; Anudpak; - 2,itNa Kjy; %d;W mf;bidLfs; - 2 (th)
15. neg;Ldpak; GSNlhdpak; mkh;rpak;f;a+hpak; ngh;f;nfypak; fyp - Nghh;dpak; 2[d;];bdpak; ngh;kpak; nkz;lytpak; - 2nehgpypak; - yhud;rpak; kw;w Mf;bidL-2 (th)
16. i`l;u[d; fhu cNyfj;ij xj;Js;sdcl;gpdpfs; i`l;[d; xj;Js;sd - 2Mthjj;dmlltizapy; i`lu[d; ,ljij2
ephzapff; ckJ cjtp Ntzb; epwfpNwhk 2 (th)
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 3
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Kidth; F. nrg];bad; me;Njhzp nry;td;> Jiz Nguhrphpah; Ntjpapay; Jiw> ,uh Nt. muR fiyf;fy;Y}hp> nrq;fy;gl;L> nry; : 9444040115
UNIVERSITY OF MADRASM.Sc., DEGREE COURSE IN CHEMISTRY
REGULATIONS (w.e.f. 2015-2016)
THIRD SEMESTER
Course Components/Title of the paper
Inst.
Hour
s/
week
Credi
ts
Exam
Hour
s
MARKS
CI
A
EX
T
TOTA
L
Core Paper – IX: Organic Chemistry-III 6 4 3 25 75 100
Core Paper – X :Inorganic Chemistry-III 6 4 3 25 75 100
Core Paper – XI: Physical Chemistry-III 6 4 3 25 75 100
Extra Disciplinary Paper – II: Materials
Science/ Bioorganic Chemistry/ Research
Methodology/Bioinorganic Chemistry
4 3 3 25 75 100
Elective Paper –III : Organic Chemistry
Practical-II*4 3 6 40 60 100
Elective Paper –IV: Inorganic Chemistry
Practical-II*4 3 6 40 60 100
Soft Skill Paper – III -- 2 3 40 60 100
30 23
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 4
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Core Paper - XI - Physical Chemistry – III (90 Hours)Unit I: Thermodynamics - I:-
Partial molar properties - Partial molar free energy (Chemical potential) - Partial molar volume and partial molar heat content - their significance and determination of these quantities. Variation of chemical potential with temperature and pressure. Thermodynamics of real gases - gas mixture - fugacity definition - determination of fugacity variation of fugacity with temperature and pressure -thermodynamics of ideal and non ideal binary solutions-dilute solutions-excess functions for non-'ideal solutions and their determination-the concepts of activity and activity coefficients-determination of standard free energies. Choice of standard states - determination of activity and activity coefficients for non-electrolytes.Unit II: Spectroscopy - II:-
Rotational spectroscopy of a rigid rotar – non-rigid rotor-diatomic and polyatomic molecules. Vibrational spectroscopy-harmonic oscillator-anhormonicity –Vibration – rotation spectra of diatomic vibrating molecules selection rules-P,Q and R branches.
Vibrational spectra of polyatomic molecules- fundamental vibrations – normal modes of vibration- overtones, combination and difference bands- Fermi resonance.
Raman spectra: Classical theory of Raman effect and molecular polarisability – pure rotational Raman spectra – Vibrational Raman spectra – Rotational fine structure – Rule of mutual exclusion – Polarization of light and Raman effect.Unit III: Spectroscopy - III:-
Resonance spectroscopy-Zeeman effect-equation of motion of spin in magnetic fields-chemical shift-spin-spin coupling-NMR of simple AX and AMX type molecules- H1 , 13C, 19F, 31P NMR spectra - a brief qualitative discussion of Fourier transform spectroscopy.
ESR: principle, spin-orbit coupling. Hyperfine interaction. McConnell reactions. Mass spectra: Theory and instrumentation, McLaffetry rearrangement fragmentation pattern for simple aliphatic and aromatic alkanes, alcohols, aldehydes and ketones.- Mossbauer spectroscopy- Doppler effects, isomer shift, electron-neutron hyperfine interactions. Quadrupole interactions and Magnetic interactions.Unit IV: Electrochemistry of solution:-
Mean ionic activity and activity coefficient: concept of ionic strength, Debye-Huckel theory of strong electrolytes-activity coefficient of strong electrolytes-determination -Debye Huckel limiting law at appreciable concentration of electrolytes - Debye Huckel Bronsted equation-qualitative and quantitative verification.
Redox reaction: cell potential, Galvanic cell, Electrolytic cell, Nernst equation for cell potential of electrolyte. Electrode equilibrium-thermodynamic electrodes and electrode potential, electrochemical cells and electromotive force.Unit V: Quantum Chemistry – IV:-
Approximation methods –perturbation and variation method –application to hydrogen ,helium atoms –R.S. coupling and term symbols for atoms in the ground state – Slater orbital and HF –SCF methods Born – Heimer approximation –valence bond theory for hydrogen molecule –LACO –MO theory for di and polyatomic molecules –concept of hybridization –
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 5
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Huckel theory for conjugated molecules (ethylene , butadiene and benzene)- semi empirical methods .Text Books:-
Elective Paper II - Physical Chemistry Parcticals I
UNIT I THERMODYNAMICS - I
1. .Partial molar properties
2. Partial molar free energy (Chemical potential)
3. Partial molar volume
4. partial molar heat content
5. Significance
6. Determination of these quantities.
7. Variation of chemical potential with temperature and pressure.
8. Thermodynamics of real gases
9. Gas mixture
10. Fugacity definition
11. Determination of fugacity
12. Variation of fugacity with temperature and pressure
13. Thermodynamics of ideal binary solutions
14. Thermodynamics of non ideal binary solutions
15. Dilute solutions
16. Excess functions for non-'ideal solutions and their determination
17. Concepts of activity and activity coefficients
18. Determination of standard free energies.
19. Choice of standard states
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 6
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
20. Determination of activity and activity coefficients for non-electrolytes.
120 PARTIAL MOLAR PROPERTIES ( THERMODYNAMICS OF OPEN SYSTEM )
The partial molar property is defined as the “ variation in the property of a open
system , with a change in number of moles , at constant temperature and pressure”
If X denotes the property of a open system ,at constant temperature and pressure ,with
number of moles of constituents n1, n2, n3… then
partial molar property X = (∂ X∂ n 1
) T, P, n2, n3 where X denotes U,H,S,A, and G
partial molar internal energy ( U ¿=( ∂U∂n 1
) T, P, n2,n3.
partial molar entropy (S¿=( ∂ S∂ n 1
) T, P, n2,n3...
partial molar enthalpy (H ) = (∂ H∂ n1
) T, P, n2,n3...
partial molar Helmholtz work function ( A ) = (∂ A∂ n 1
) T, P, n2,n3...
partial molar Free energy (G ) = (∂ G∂ n 1
) T, P, n2,n3...
partial molar volume V = (∂V∂ n 1
) T, P, n2,n3...
220 PARTIAL MOLAR FREE ENERGY (CHEMICAL POTENTIAL)
The chemical potential of a given substance is the change in the free energy of the
open system with a change in number of moles , at constant temperature and pressure” .
It is expressed as μi = (∂ G∂ n 1
) T, P, n2,n3...
320 PARTIAL MOLAR VOLUME
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 7
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
The partial molar volume of a given substance is the change in the volume of the open
system with a change in number of moles , at constant temperature and pressure” .
It is expressed as V = (∂V∂ n 1
) T, P, n2,n3...
Significance:
1. Molar volume is not additive but Partial Molar volume is additive .
2. The additive relation is known as Euler relation
Problem: The partial molar volume of alcohol in a mixture of alcohol and water is 45.5 ml,
nA = 2.0 mol, nB = 2.0 mol . Find the partial molar volume of water if the total volume of the
mixture is 101.5
Solution:
V = 101.5 ml
V A = 45.5 ml,
nA = 2.0 mol,
nB = 2.0 mol
V B = ?
V B = V−nA V A
nB
= 101.5−91.0
2
= 5.25 ml
Problem 2: The partial molar volume of alcohol and water in a mixture of alcohol and
water is 45.5 ml and 5.25 ml respectively. If, nA = 2.0 mol, nB = 2.0 mol find the total
volume of the mixture
Solution
V A = 45.5 ml,
V B = 5.25 ml
nA = 2.0 mol,
nB = 2.0 mol
V = ?
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 8
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
= 2 ( 45.5 ) + 2 ( 5.25)
= 101 .5 ml
Problem 3 :Partial molar Volume of ethanol and water is 57.4 ml and 16. 9 ml respectively
Find the total volume of the mixture when one mole of each is mixed. .Find also the
volume of mixing
Density of ethanol = 0.789 gm/ cm3
Solution:
Mole fraction = 0.5
Partial molar Volume of ethanol V A= 57.4 ml
Partial molar Volume of water V B= 16 .9 ml
V = nA V A + nBV B
Volume of mixture = 1( 57.4) + 1 ( 18)
= 74.3 ml
To find volume of mixing:
volume of mixing = volume of the mixture - volume of separated components
Volume of one mole of pure ethanol V = mass
density
= 46. 070. 789
= 58.3 ml
Volume of one mole of pure water
= 181
= 18 ml
Total volume of Pure components before mixing
= 18 + 58.3
= 76.3 ml
volume of the mixture = 74.3ml
The difference between the volume of the mixture and the separated components
= 74.3- 76.3
= - 2.0 ml
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 9
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
FOR ONLINE TEST -09-08-2020 SUNDAY
. The partial molar volume of alcohol in a mixture containing one mole of alcohol and one
mole of water is 50 ml, Find the partial molar volume of water if the total volume of the
mixture is 101
Ans
V = v1V1+ n2V2
101= 1 ( 50) +1( V2)
V2 = 51
The partial molar volume of alcohol and water in a mixture of alcohol and water is 40 ml
and 20 ml respectively. If, nA = 2.0 mol, nB = 2.0 mol find the total volume of the mixture
Ans : 2(40) + 2(20)
= 120 ml
Partial molar Volume of ethanol and water is 53 .1 ml and 16. 9 ml respectively Find the
volume of mixing when one mole of each is mixed. Total volume of Pure components
before mixing is 72 ml
V = 1(53.1) + 1( 16.9)
= 70 ml
Volume of mixing = 70 -72 = -2 ml
420 PARTIAL MOLAR HEAT CONTENT
The partial molar heat content of a given substance is the change in the heat content
of the open system with a change in number of moles , at constant temperature and
pressure” .
It is expressed as H= (∂ H∂ n 1
) T, P, n2,n3...
520 SIGNIFICANCE
6
20 DETERMINATION OF THESE QUANTITIES.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 10
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
DETERMINATION OF PARTIAL MOLAR VOLUME
1. DIRECT METHOD
Consider a two component system
1. Determine the volume V, for various mixtures of two components by keeping the number
of moles n1 constant and varying the other ( n2) .
2. The volume of the solution is plotted against molality (m2)
3. The slope at a given concentration represents the partial molar volume of the solute at
the concentration.
4. Partial molar volume of the solvent can be obtained from Gibbs Duhem equation.
Gibbs –Duhem equation is ∑ ¿dμi= 0
Where ni – number of moles. μi - chemical potential
2. METHOD OF INTERCEPT:
By this method, it is possible to determine the partial molar properties of both
constituents of a binary mixture of any composition.
Let’ Va’ be the average volume , n1 and n2 are the number of moles of solvent and solute
of a binary mixture then
Va = V
(n1+n2)
Rearranging,
V = Va (n1+ n2)
Differentiating with respect to n2
(∂ V∂ n2
) = Va ( 0+1) + (n1+ n2)(∂ V a
∂ n2)
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 11
n1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1
n2 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
V = n1+ n2 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
= Va + (n1+ n2)(∂ V a
∂ n 2)
At constant composition ‘∂’ can be replaced by ‘d’
= Va + (n1+ n2)(dV a
dn 2)
= Va + (n1+n2)
d n2 dV a ---------------------
1
The mole fraction of the solvent x1 = n1
(n1+n2)
differentiating with respect to n2, [ d( 1x ) = -
1x2 ]
d x1
d n2 = -
n1
(n1+n2)2
= n1
(n1+n2)× −1
(n1+n2)
= x1 × −1
(n1+n2) [ x1 =
n1
(n1+n2) ]
= −x1
(n1+n2)
Rearranging, (n1+n2)
d n2 = -
x1
d x1
substituting in 1 (∂ V∂ n2
) = Va - x1
d x1 dV a
V 2 = V a - x1 dV a
d x1
-------------------2
The values of Va for mixtures of various compositions are plotted against x1 . Let O be the
point corresponding to the mole fraction of the solvent in solution, at which the partial
molar volume is required. Through O, a tangent LM to the curve is drawn. The slope d V a
d x1
is found out from the graph
V 2 = V a - x1 ( slope)
Using this relation the partial molar volume can be found out.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 12
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
The slope of LM = d V a
d x1 -------------------3
Slope = Tan < NOL
= ln
ON ------------------------4
∴ dV a
d x1 =
lnON [ from 3 and 4]
LN = ONd V a
d x1 [ Rearranging]
= x1 d V a
d x1
V 2 = V a - x1 d V a
d x1- [ from 1]
= AL – AN
= LN
Same way BM = V 1
Procedure:
1. Prepare 10 set of binary Mixture with varying weight fraction
2. Find out the density of each mixture
3. Convert the density in to specific volume
4. Plot specific volume against weight fraction of A.
5. Draw a tangent through the point at which pmv is required.
6. The intercept of the tangent along Wa = 1 is noted.
7. Multiply this with the molecular weight of A
8. This will give the pmv of A
9. The intercept of the tangent along Wb = 1 is noted.
10. Multiply this with the molecular weight of B
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 13
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
11. This will give the pmv of B
3. BY DENSITY MEASUREMENT
𝛒 = n1 M 1+n2 M 2
1000V
= n1 M 1+M 2
1000 V [ consider 1 mole of solute]
1000V 𝛒 = n1 M 1+M 2 [ rearranging]
n1=1000 V ρ−M 2
M 1
dn1=1
M 1 [ 1000( Vdρ + ρdV)- 0 ] [Differentiating ]
d n1
dV =
1M1
[ 1000( V(d ρdV ) + ρ] [dividing by dV]
dVd n1
= M1
¿¿ [ taking reciprocal]
V 1 = M1
¿¿ --------1 [
dVd n1
= V 1 ]
V = 1c
dV = −1c2 dc [ d(
1c ) =
−1c2 dc ]
dVd ρ =
−1c2
d cd ρ [ dividing by
dρ]
d ρdV = - c2
d ρdc [ taking reciprocal]
V d ρdV = - V× c2
d ρdc [multiplying by V]
V d ρdV = - c
d ρdc [ V=
1c ]
substituting in 1 we get
V 1 = M1
¿¿
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 14
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
determine density of the solution at various concentrations and plot of ρ versus ‘c’ gives the
slope d ρdc from which V 1 can be calculated
graph:
DETERMINATION USING APPARENT MOLAR PROPERTY:
Apparent molar property of a solute(φ ¿ is given as
φ = G−n1 G1
n2
G 1−the property per moleof pure constituent1
G−the property per mole of solution
n1 – number of moles of solvent
n2 - number of moles of solute.
φ n2 = G−n1G1 [ rearranging]
G=n1G1+φ n2
differentiating with respect to n2,
∂ G∂ n2
= 0 + n2 ∂ φ∂ n2
+ φ
G = n2 ∂ φ∂ n2
+ φ [∂ G∂ n2
= G]
for dilute solution n2 = m. therefore the above equation becomes
G = m ∂ φ∂ m + φ
= m ∂ φ∂ m + φ
= ∂ φ
∂( lnm) + φ m
dm = d(ln m )
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 15
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
plot of φ against ln m gives the partial molar property
Problem
Determine the pmv of water and ethanol at mole fraction of alcohol 0.6 from the following
data. The solution gives intercepts 1.1 and 0.9 on the Walc = 1 axis and Wwater = 1 axis
respectively.
Solution:
partial molar volume of ethanol = 1.1 × molecular weight of ethanol
= 1.1 × 46
= 50.6 cm3 / mole
partial molar volume of water = 0.9 × molecular weight of water
= 0.9 × 18
= 16.2 cm3 / mole
Problem : Two moles of solute is dissolved in 10 moles of solvent whose entropy is 10
units. if the entropy of solvent is 20 apparent molar is
Solution:
φ = S−n1 S1
n2
= 20−(10)(0.2)
10
720 VARIATION OF CHEMICAL POTENTIAL WITH TEMPERATURE AND
PRESSURE
VARIATION OF CHEMICAL POTENTIAL WITH TEMPERATURE
(Relationship between chemical potential and partial molar entropy)
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 16
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
The chemical potential is given by μ = (∂ G∂ n
) T, P, n2,n3...
Differentiating with respect to T at constant pressure and number of moles
( ∂ μ∂ T )P , N = ( ∂2G
∂ n ∂T) -----------------1
For an open system, G = H-TS
= (E + PV) – TS [ H = E +PV]
Differentiating
dG = dE + PdV + VdP – TdS – SdT
= dq + VdP – TdS – SdT [ from I law dE + PdV = dq]
= TdS + VdP – TdS – SdT [ from II law dq = TdS]
dG = VdP – SdT ---------------------2
but we know that G = f ( T, P, n1,n2,n3....)
The total differential is given by
dG = (∂ G∂T
) P, n2,n3... dT +( ∂ G∂ P
) T, n2,n3. dP +( ∂ G∂ n 1
) T, P,n2 dn1 +( ∂ G∂ n 2
) T, P,n1 dn2 ---------------3
equating the coefficients of dT in 2 and 3 we get
( ∂ G∂T
) P, n2,n3... = - S
Differentiating both sides with respect to n
( ∂2G∂ T ∂ n
) = - ( ∂ S∂ n
) T, P
Substituting in 1 [ ( ∂2G∂ T ∂ n
) = ¿)]
( ∂ μ∂ T ) P,N = - ( ∂ S
∂ n) T, P
= - S
= - partial molar entropy of component i.
At constant pressure [ ‘∂’ becomes ‘d’ ]
dμdT = - S
dμ = - S dT
This shows that when temperature increases, chemical potential decreases.
liquid
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 17
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
gas
μ solid
Temperature Tm Tb
The graph of chemical potential versus temperature for a substance in solid, liquid
and gaseous state shows that at the melting point the chemical potential of solid and
liquid are same. Similarly at the boiling point, the chemical potential of liquid and
vapour are same.
VARIATION OF CHEMICAL POTENTIAL WITH PRESSURE
(Relationship between chemical potential and partial molar volume)
The chemical potential is given by μi = (∂ G∂ n 1
) T, P, n2,n3...
Differentiating μ with respect to P at constant temperature and number of moles
( ∂ μ∂ P ) T,P = ( ∂2G
∂ n 1∂ P) -----------------1
For an open system, G = H-TS
= E + PV – TS [ H = E +PV]
dG = dE + PdV + VdP – TdS – SdT
= dq + VdP – TdS – SdT [ from I law dE + PdV = dq]
= TdS + VdP – TdS – SdT [ from II law dq = TdS]
dG = VdP – SdT ---------------------2
but we know that G = f ( T, P, n1,n2,n3....)
The total differential is given by
dG = (∂ G∂T
) P, n2,n3... dT +( ∂ G∂ P
) T, n2,n3. dP +( ∂ G∂ n 1
) T, P,dn1+( ∂ G∂ n 2
) T, P, dn2 ------------3
equating the coefficients of dP in 2 and 3 we get
(∂ G∂ P
) T, n2,n3... = V
Differentiating with respect to n, ( ∂2G∂ P ∂n
) = (∂ V∂ n
) T, P
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 18
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Substituting in 1 [ ( ∂2G∂ T ∂ n
) = ¿
)]
( ∂ μ∂ P ) T,n1,n2.. = ( ∂ V
∂ n) T, P
= V
= partial molar volume of component i.
820 THERMODYNAMICS OF REAL GASES-
920GAS MIXTURE
1020 FUGACITY
It is the pressure term for real gas. It is represented by the letter ‘f ’
Relation between fugacity and free energy:
For a closed system, G = H-TS
= (E + PV) – TS [ H = E +PV]
Differentiating dG = dE + PdV + VdP – TdS – SdT
= dq + VdP – TdS – SdT [ from I law]
= TdS + VdP – TdS – SdT [ from II
law]
dG = VdP – SdT
At constant temperature, ( dG) T = VdP
= nRT dPP [ PV = nRT]
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 19
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
= nRT d(lnP) [ f=P]
= nRT d(lnP)
∫ dG = ∫f 1
f 2
nRT d (lnf ) [Integration between fugacities f1 and
f2 ]
G = nRT ¿¿
= nRT( ln f2 – ln f1)
= nRT ln f 2
f 1
This is the relation between fugacity and free energy:
Problem 1. Calculate the free energy change accompanying the compression of one mole
of a gas at 27 o C, from 20 to 200 atm. The fugacitities at 20 and 200 atm pressure are 50 and
100 atm respectively.
Solution:
Temperature T = 27 o C
= 27 +273
= 300K
Initial fugacity f1 = 50 atm
Final fugacity f2 = 100 atm
free energy change ∆G = ?
The relation between fugacity and free energy∆ G = nRT ln f 2
f 1
∆G = nRT ln f 2
f 1
= (1) (8.314) ( 300) ln 10050
= 2494.2 ln 2
1120DETERMINATION OF FUGACITY
There are two methods
1. GRAPHICAL METHOD
Fugacity is determined using the value of departure from ideal behavior (𝛂)
α = V id - V ------------------1
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 20
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
= RTP - V [ PV = RT]
V = RTP - α
Multiplying by dP
VdP = RTP dP - α dP
dG = VdP at constant temperature. therefore
dG = RTP dP - α dP -----------------------2
the relation between fugacity and dG is given by dG = RT d ln f ---------------------------3
Comparing 2 and 3
RT dlnf = RT dPP – α dP
dividing by RT
dlnf = dPP –
αRT dP
Upon integration
∫ dlnf = ∫ dPP - ∫
0
P αRT
dP
lnf = ln P – 1
RT ∫0
P
α dP
Rearranging
lnf - ln P = – 1
RT ∫0
P
α dP
ln fp = –
1RT ∫
0
P
α dP
The integral in this equation can be evaluated by measuring the area under the
curve obtained when α is plotted against P. In this method, for different pressure value ,
departure from ideal behavior (𝛂) is determined using the formula
α = RTP – V
and a graph is plotted with pressure along x- axis and 𝛂 along y – axis .The area under the
curve gives the value of ∫0
P
αdP using this value, fugacity can be calculated by the formula
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 21
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
ln fp = -
1RT ∫
0
P
αdP
= - 1
RT × area under the curve
2 FROM DENSITY MEASUREMENTS
if 𝛂 is independent of pressure the this method can be used.
ln fp = - ∫
0
P αRT
dP [ from method 1]
= - α
RT ∫0
P
dP [if 𝛂 is independent of pressure ]
= - αPRT
fp = e
−αPRT
= 1 - αPRT [ e− x=1−x ¿
= RT −αP
RT
= PVRT [ α =
RTP – V]
= P
RTV
= P
P id
f = P2
P id
Pid = ρ2
M RT
ρ2
P2 =
ρ1
P1
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 22
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Problem: Find the fugacity of N2 at 100 K and 100 atm pressure. The area under the curve
obtained when α is plotted against P is 83.14 units
Solution:
area under the curve = 83.14
temperature = 100 K
ln fp = –
1RT ∫
0
P
α dP
= - 1
RT × area under the curve
= - 1
8.314×100 × 83.14
ln fp = - 0.1
Taking exponential on both sides
fp = e−0.1
f = P× e−0.1
f = 100 e−0.1 atm
1220VARIATION OF FUGACITY WITH TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE
VARIATION OF FUGACITY WITH TEMPERATURE: The relation between free energy change and fugacity is given by
∆G = RT ln f
rearranging
∆ GT = R ln f
∆ G = G2 - G1
G2
T -
G1
T = R lnf
Differentiating with respect to temperature we get
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 23
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
∂(G2
T)
∂ T - ∂(
G1
T)
∂ T =
∂(R ln f )∂ T
From Gibbs – Helmholtz equation we know that ∂( G
T)
∂T = -
HT2
Therefore the above equation becomes,
- H2
T 2 - ( - H 1
T 2 ) = R ∂( ln f )∂ T
- H 2
T 2 + H1
T 2 = R ∂( ln f )
∂ T
H ¿
T 2 ¿ = R ∂(lnf )
∂T
Rearranging
H ¿
R T 2 ¿ = ∂(lnf )
∂T
∂(lnf )∂T
= H ¿
R T 2 ¿
At constant pressure ‘∂’ becomes ‘d’
d (lnf )
dT =
H ¿
R T 2 ¿
d ( lnf) = ( H2-H1 ) dT
R T 2
If the fugacity changes from f1 to f2 during temperature changes from T1 to T2 the
above integration can be done within the limits.
∫f
f 2
d (lnf ) = H1−H 2
R ∫
T 2
T 1
¿¿ ) dT
ln f = H 1−H 2
R [
−1T ] ∫ dT
T2 = −1T
Applying limits
ln f 2 – ln f 1 = H 1−H 2
R [
−1T 1
- (−1T 2
) ]
ln f 2f 1 =
H 1−H 2
R [ -
1T1
+1T2
]
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 24
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
= - H 1−H 2
R [
1T2
- 1T1
]
ln f 2f 1 = -
H 1−H 2
R [
T1−T 2
T 1 T2 ] .
using this expression, variation of fugacity with temperature can be calculated if the fugacity
is known at one temperature
VARIATION OF FUGACITY WITH PRESSURE:
The influence of pressure on the fugacity of gas at constant temperature can be derived as
follows
μ = RT ln f
Differentiating with respect to pressure
(∂ μ∂ P
¿ T = RT ∂lnf∂ p
(∂ μ∂ P
¿ T = V
Substituting in the above equation,
V = RT ∂lnf∂ p
Rearranging ∂lnf∂ p =
VRT
At constant temperature ‘∂’ becomes ‘d’
d lnfdp =
VRT
dlnf = V
RT dP
If the fugacity changes from f1 to f2 during pressure changes from P1 to P2 the
above integration can be done within the limits.
∫f 1
f 2
dlnf = V
RT ∫P 2
P 1
dP
ln f = V
RT [ P ] ∫ dP = P
applying limits
ln f 2 – ln f 1 = V
RT [ P2-P1 ]
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 25
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
ln f 2f 1 =
VRT [ P2-P1 ]
using this expression, variation of fugacity with pressure can be calculated if the fugacity is
known at one pressure
Problem The fugacity of oxygen at 100 K was found to be 95 atm. Calculate its value at 200
K . The increase in molar heat content is 19.8 cal/deg/mol [ given ln 95 = 4.55, e4.55 = 90.0
R = 1.98 cal/mol]
Solution:
The fugacity at 100 K = 95 atm
The fugacity at 200 K = ?
∆H = 19.8 cal/deg/mol
T 1 = 100 K
T 2 = 200 K
ln f 2f 1 = -
H 1−H 2
R [
T1−T 2
T 1 T2 ]
ln f 295 = -
19.81.98 [
200−10020000 ] .
= - 10
200
ln f2 - ln 95 = - 10
200 [ ln (mn ) = ln m – ln n ]
ln f2 = ln 95 - 10
200
= ln 95 -0.05
=4.55 – 0.05
= 4.5
f 2 = e4.5
f2 = 90.0 atm
Problem 5: Calculate the difference in heat content of one mole of oxygen gas at 1 atm.
Pressure and the same gas when behaving ideally at 25 oC.[ given for oxygen Tc = 154.3 K,
Pc = 49.7 atm,
Solution:
P1 = 1atm
T = 25oC = 298 K
R = 1.987 cal/deg/mol
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 26
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
H-H * = 9 ×1.987 ×154.3
128 × 49.7 ( 1 – 18 (154.3)2
(298)2 ) ( -1)
= 1.66 cal /mol
Problem6: The fugacity of oxygen at 100 atm was found to be 95 atm. Calculate its value at 200 atm . The molar volume at 100 K was found to be 0.198 litSolution:
ln f 2f 1 =
VRT [ P2-P1 ]
ln f 295 =
0.1981.98× 100 [ 200 - 100 ]
= 0.1
ln f2 - ln 95 = 0.1 [ ln (mn ) = ln m – ln n ]
ln f2 = ln 95 +0.1 = 4.55 +0.1 = 4.65 f2 =104.58 atm
1320 THERMODYNAMICS OF IDEAL SOLUTIONS
IDEAL SOLUTION: A solution is said to be ideal if it obeys Roault’s law through out the composition range of the system.
Raoult’s law states “ Partial vapour pressure of any constituent of solution is equal to product of mole fraction and its vapour pressure in the pure state.” Partial pressure = mole fraction × vapour pressure p1 = x1 × p0
THERMODYNAMICSa. Free energy change of mixing:
∆ Gmix = RT ∑ x i ln x i
Proof:
Suppose a solution is formed by mixing n1 moles of A and n2 moles of B. The free
energy of the solution is given by
G = n1 GA+¿ n2 GB
Where GA and GB are the partial molal free energies ( chemical potential)of the
constituents.
∆ Gmix = free energy of solution – ( sum of free energies of the constituents)
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 27
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
= G – (n1 GA+¿ n2 GB)
Substituting the value og ‘G’
∆ Gmix = (n1 GA+¿ n2 GB ) – (n1 GA+¿ n2 GB)
= n1 ¿ – GA ¿+¿ n2 ¿) ------------1
chemical potential μ = μ0+ RT ln a
Where ‘a’ is activity
or
GA = GA + RT ln a A
Rearranging
GA - GA = RT ln a A Similarly
GB - GB = RT ln aB
Substituting in the above equation(1)
∆ Gmix = n1RT ln a A+¿ n2RT ln aB
= RT (n1ln a A+¿ n2 ln aB)
If the solution is ideal , activity is equal to mole fraction
∆ Gmix = RT (n1ln x A+¿ n2 ln xB)
Dividing by ¿¿ n2)
∆ Gmix
(n1+n2) = RT (
n1
(n1+n2) ln x A+¿
n2
(n1+n2) ln xB)
Since x A = n1
(n1+n2) , xB =
n2
(n1+n2)
∆ Gmix
(n1+n2) = RT ( x Aln x A+¿ xB ln xB)
If the total amount of the two components is one (n¿¿1+n2)¿ = 1
∆ Gmix = RT ∑ x i ln x i
b. Volume change of mixing:
∆ V mix = 0Proof: The change in chemical potential with pressure is equal to molar volumed μd P = V
∆ Gmix = ∆ V mix
Differentiating the ∆ Gmix with respect to pressure we get
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 28
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
∂(∆ Gmix)∂ P
= 0
Therefore ∆ V mix = 0c. Enthalpy change of mixing:
∆ Hmix = 0
Proof:
∆ Gmix = RT ∑ x i ln x i
Dividing by ‘T’
∆ Gmix
T = R ∑ x i ln x i -------------2
Differentiating the ( ∆ Gmix
T¿with respect to Temperature we get
ddT (∆ Gmix
T )= 0 -------------3
Differentiating the ∆ Gmix
Tby U / V model we get
d ( UV ) =
V dUdT
−U dVdT
V 2
ddT (∆ Gmix
T ) = T d
dT (∆ Gmix )−∆ Gmix (1 )
T 2 ----------4
Comparing 3 and 4
T ddT ( ∆Gmix )−∆ Gmix = 0
T ddT ( ∆Gmix )=∆ Gmix ----------------- 5
Applying Gibbs – Helmholtz equation ∆ G - ∆ H = T ∂(∆ G)∂ T
Introducing the subscript ‘mix’
∆ Gmix - ∆ Hmix = Td
dT ( ∆Gmix )
Substituting from 5 ∆ Gmix - ∆ Hmix = ∆ Gmix
Therefore ∆ Hmix = 0
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 29
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
1420 NON IDEAL BINARY SOLUTIONS
Ideal solution : benzene and toluene, n-heptane and n- hexane , ethyl bromide and ethyl
iodide, chloro benzene and bromo benzene
For ideal solution ∆ V mix = 0 For non - ideal solution ∆ V mix ≠ 0
A solution is said to be non- ideal if it does not obey Roault’s law
Raoult’s law states “ Partial vapour pressure of any constituent of solution is equal to product of mole fraction and its vapour pressure in the pure state.” Partial pressure = mole fraction × vapour pressure p1 = x1 × p0
Example : CS2 and acetone , acetone and chloroform
1520 DILUTE SOLUTIONS
A dilute solution may be defined as one in which solvent obeys Raoult’s law and
the solute satisfies Henry’s law.
According to Henry’s law f2 = K x2 where K is Henry’s constant
The properties of dilute solution are called colligative properties. These are
1. Lowering of vapour pressure
2. Elevation in boiling point
3. Depression in freezing point
4. Osmotic pressure
1620 EXCESS FUNCTIONS FOR NON - IDEAL SOLUTIONS AND THEIR
DETERMINATION
EXCESS FUNCTION: It is defined as the difference between the partial molar property of a
component in a real mixture and that of the component in an ideal mixture.
If X is any component in the mixture, then
Excess Function = (X) real mixture - (X) ideal mixture
EXCESS QUANTITIES:
1. Excess molar volume
2. . Excess molar enthalpy
3. . Excess heat capacity
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 30
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
4. . Excess chemical potential
1720 CONCEPTS OF ACTIVITY AND ACTIVITY COEFFICIENTS
ACTIVITY
Activity of a substance in any given state is defined as the ratio of the fugacity of the substance in the mixture to the fugacity of the same substance in the pure state.
Activity = fugacity∈mixture
fugacity∈ pure state
a = f 1
f 0
Problem 7: The fugacity of a pure gas is 20 atm and the same gas in a mixture is 40 atm . Calculate the activity of the gas.
Solution:
Activity = fugacity∈mixture
fugacity∈ pure state
a = 4020
= 2
Activity coefficient:
For real gas the activity is proportional to pressure a ∝ P
a = 𝛄 P
𝛄 is called activity coefficient.
Activity coefficient can be defined as the ratio between activity and pressure of the real gas.
activity coefficient 𝛄 = activitypressure
Problem 8: The activity of a gas at 20 atm pressure is 5 . What is its activity coefficient?
Solution:
Activity coefficient 𝛄 = activitypressure
= 5
20
= 0.25
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 31
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Problem 9. The fugacity of a pure gas is 5 atm and the same gas in a mixture is 20 atm
Calculate the activity coefficient of the gas at 40 atm pressure
Solution:
Activity coefficient = activitypressure
Activity = fugacity∈mixture
fugacity∈ pure state
a = 205
= 4
γ = 4
40
= 0.1
1820 DETERMINATION OF STANDARD FREE ENERGIES.
There are three methods
1. From equilibrium constant
∆ G0 = RT ln K eqm
2. From EMF measurements
∆ G0 = - nE0 F
3. From entropy measurements
∆ G0 = ∆ H 0 - T ∆ S0
∆ S0 can be calculated from III law of thermodynamics using heat capacity
measurements
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 32
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
1920 CHOICE OF STANDARD STATES
1. FOR GASES :
1. Since the fugacities of real gases can be measured, the standard sate can be fixed
in terms of fugacity.
2. The fugacity corresponding to 1 atm, pressure is taken as standard state .
2. COMPONENTS IN SOLUTION:
The standard state for solvent is based on Raoult’s law and that for solute is based
on Henry’s law
A. SOLVENT:
1. The standard state for solvent is chosen as a total pressure of 1 atm.
Let f 0 be the fugacity at 1atm. pressure. f 0 = p
On addition of solute the fugacity changes in to f 1
activity is given by a = f 1
f 0
According to Raoult’s law f1 = fo x1
substituting in the above equation we get
a = f o x1
f 0
= x1
3. The activity of solvent is equal to its mole fraction.
4. For a non ideal solution, f 0 ≠ p
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 33
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
B. SOLUTE:
1. If the solute and solvent are completely miscible in all proportions, the standard
state of solute is taken in the same manner as for the solvent.
2. When the solute has a limited solubility , two systems are used.
1. RATIONAL SYSTEM:
1. If the composition is expressed in mole fraction , the system is known as rational
system.
2. Here the standard state is the fugacity , at which the mole fraction of the solute is unity.
3. At this stage it behaves ideally and obeys Henry’s law.
4. According to Henry’s law f2 = K x2 where K is Henry’s constant
5.At the standard state, (x2 = 1) let f 2 = f 0 then ,the above equation becomes f 0 = K
substituting in the above equation we get
a = Kx 2K
= x2
2 PRACTICAL SYSTEM:
1. If the composition is expressed in molarity or molality , the system is known as
practical system.
2. Under these conditions, Henrys law becomes f2 = K m2
3. Choice standard fugacity is such that m2 → 0 , a2
m2 → 1
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 34
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Lim [a2
m2 ] = 1
4. If the activity is plotted against mole fraction of the solute , standard state is the state at
which m2 = 1
2020 DETERMINATION OF ACTIVITY AND ACTIVITY COEFFICIENTS FOR
NON-ELECTROLYTES
By Nernst distribution law
Nernst distribution law states that when a solute is distributed two immiscible solvents, the ratio of concentrations of the solute in solvent – 1 and solvent -2 is a constant.
Let a solute be distributed between a pair of two immiscible solvents A and B . The molalities of solutes in the two solvents A and B are mA and mB respectively. For a system in equilibrium fA = fB . From the definition of activity
Activity = fugacity∈mixture
fugacity∈ pure state
Let aA and aB represents the activity of the solute in solvent A and B respectively. Then
aA = f A
f A0 , aB =
f B
f B0
Dividing
aA
aB =
f B0
f A0
Therefore aA = aB × f B
0
f A0 ------------------------------------------1
f B0 = mB
f A0 = mA
Substituting in equation 1 we get
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 35
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
aA = aB × mB
mA ----------------2
According to Henry’s law
f A = K A mA
f B = K BmB
At equilibrium f A = f B , Therefore
K A mA = K BmB
Rearranging
mB
mA =
K A
K B
Substituting in 2 , it becomes
aA = aB ×K A
K B where
K A
K B ratio of Henry’s law
The values of Henry’s law constant is given by K A
K B = lim
mB → 0
mA
mB
Substituting in the above equation we get aA = aB × limmB → 0
m A
mB
The limiting value of the equation is evaluated by plotting mA
mB against mB and extrapolating
the graph to zero concentration.
limmB → 0
mA
mB
From the graph limmB → 0
mA
mB can be found out . From which we can determine the
activity of the solute by knowing the activity of the same solute in solvent B( mB)
activity coefficient 𝛄m = a2
x2
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 36
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
= p2
x2 ×
p2¿
x2¿
To find p2
¿
x2¿ , a graph is plotted by
p2
x2 versus x2 and the straight line obtained is
extrapolated to
x2 = 0. This gives the value of ‘k’.
p2 can be obtained from the graph for the particular mole fraction. substituting in 2 we can
calculate the activity of solute.
Problem 10 : Mercurous chloride is distributed in benzene and water. The concentration in
benzene and water are given below.
Aqueous layer 0.2 0.1 0.05 0.03 0.01
Benzene layer 0.02 0.01 0.004 0.00
2
?
The plot of concentration ratio against concentration in benzene gives an intercept of
12.2. Plot the data and Calculate the activity of mercurous chloride in water when the
concentration in benzene is 0.01.
Solution:
limmB → 0
mA
mB = 12.2
aB = 0.01
aA = aB × limmB → 0
mA
mB
= 0.01 × 12.2 = 0.122
Problem: 0.5 molal aqueous solution of non – volatile solute has a vapour pressure of 15.5
mm of mercury. At the same temperature, the vapour pressure of pure water is 31.0 mm of
mercury. Find the activity of and activity coefficient of water
Solution:
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 37
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
a = 15.531
= 0.5
activity coefficient 𝛄m = am
= 0.5
100018
= 0.5
55.5
= 0.009
activity coefficient 𝛄x = ax
= 0.5
100018
+0.5
= 0.556
= 0.05
Problem: In an experiment ,the partial pressure of methanol in aqueous solution at various
mole fraction was found out. The plot of p2
x2 versus x2 on extrapolation to x2 = 0, gives a
value of 180 . At a mole fraction of 0.6 , the p2
x2 value from the graph was found to be 15.
Calculate the activity and activity coefficient of methanol
Solution:
p2¿
x2¿ = 180
p2 corresponds to 0.6 = p2
x2 × x2
= 15 × 0. 6
= 9
a2 = p2
p2¿
x2¿
= 9
180
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 38
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
= 0. 05
activity coefficient 𝛄m = a2
x2
= 0.050.6
= 0.080
Problem One molal solution of sucrose has a vapour pressure of 20.5 mm of mercury at
100K. At the same temperature the vapour pressure of pure solvent is 20.8 mm. calculate
the activity and activity coefficient of solvent in the given solution.
a = p0
p1
=20.520.8
= 0.98
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 39
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
UNIT II SPECTROSCOPY – II
A. Rotational spectroscopy
1. of a rigid rotar
2. non-rigid rotor
3. diatomic
4. polyatomic molecules.
B. Vibrational spectroscopy-
1. harmonic oscillator-
2. anhormonicity
3. –Vibration – rotation spectra of diatomic vibrating molecules
4. selection rules-
5. P,Q and R branches.
6. Vibrational spectra of polyatomic molecules-
7. fundamental vibrations
8. normal modes of vibration
9. overtones,
10. combination and difference bands-
11. Fermi resonance.
C. Raman spectra:
1. Classical theory of Raman effect
2. molecular polarisability
3. pure rotational Raman spectra
4. Vibrational Raman spectra
5. Rotational fine structure
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 40
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
6. Rule of mutual exclusion
7. Polarization of light and Raman effect.
A. ROTATIONAL SPECTROSCOPY ( MICROWAVE SPECTRA)
These spectra result from transition between the rotational energy levels of a gaseous
molecules, which posses a permanent dipole moment on the absorption of radiation falling
in the microwave region.
RADIO WAVE REGION
MICROW WAVE REGION
IR REGION
VISIBLEREGION
UVREGION
X-RAYREGION
wavelength 1-1000 m 1-100 cm 1-𝛍m – 1 m 380- 780 nm 1-380 nm 0.1-10 nm
Thus these spectra are shown by molecules possessing a permanent dipole moment
example: like HCl, CO, NO and H2O vapour. Homonuclear diatomic molecules such as
H2,Cl2 O2, N2 etc and linear poly atomic molecules such as CO2 do not posses dipole
moment and hence they do not show microwave spectra.
14 ROTATIONAL SPECTROSCOPY OF A RIGID ROTAR
The system consisting of two spherical particles attached together, separated by finite
fixed distance and capable of rotating about an axis passing through the centre of mass
constitutes the rigid rotator.
A diatomic molecule consists of two masses bound together. The distance between
the masses, or the bond length, (l) can be considered fixed because the level of vibration in
the bond is small compared to the bond length.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 41
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Figure 1.11.1: Rigid Rotor Model of a Diatomic Molecule
Reduced Mass
The system can be simplified using the concept of reduced mass which allows it to be treated
as one rotating body. The system can be entirely described by the fixed distance between the
two masses instead of their individual radii of rotation.
RELATION BETWEEN MOMENT OF INERTIA AND INTER NUCLEAR
DISTANCE
Consider a rotating molecule as rigid rotator with free axis. Let m1 and m2 be
the masses of the atoms connected by a rigid bar of length r
r = r1 + r2
r1 r2
r
This molecule rotates end over end about a point C . This is defined by balancing equation
m1r1 = m2r2 ------------------------------------------------------1
The moment of inertia about C is given by
I = m1r12 + m2r2 2
= ( m1r1 ) r1 + (m2r2 ) r2 [ splitting the square terms]
= (m2r2 ) r1 + (m1r1) r2 [ using 1]
= r1 r2 (m1 + m2 )
from 1b m1r1 = m2r2
m1r1 = m2 ( r - r1 ) [ from 1 r2 = r - r1 ]
= m2 r - m2 r1
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 42
r1
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
m1r1 + m2 r1 = m2 r [ rearranging]
r1 ( m1 + m2 ) = m2 r
∴ r1 = m2 r
m1+m 2
Similarly, m2r2 = m1r1 [ from 2]
m2r2 = m1 ( r – r2 ) [ from 1 r1 = r - r2 ]
= m1 r - m1 r2
m2r2 + m1 r2 = m1 r [ rearranging]
r2 ( m1 + m2 ) = m1 r
∴ r2 = m1 r
m1+m 2
Substituting the values of r1 and r2 in equation 1
I = (m2 r
m1+m 2) (
m1 rm1+m 2
¿ (m1 + m2 )
= (m1 m2
m1+m 2) r2
I = μ r2 where μ is reduced mass μ = m1m2
m1+m 2
This shows, the relation between atomic masses and the bond length.
Q: Derive the relation between atomic mass and bond length of a diatomic molecule.
EXPRESSION FOR ROTATIONAL ENERGY LEVEL:
The expression for rotational energy is obtained by solving the Schrodinger equation
Schrodinger equation in Cartesian co-ordinates is ∂ 2Ψ∂ x2 +
∂ 2Ψ∂ y 2 +
∂ 2Ψ∂ z 2 +
8π 2mh2 ( E – V)
Ψ = 0
This can be converted into spherical polar co-ordinates using x = r sin θ cosφ
y = r sin θ sinφ z = r cos θ and the transformed equation is
1r2
∂∂ r ( r2
∂Ψ∂ r ) +
1r2 sinθ
∂
∂θ ( sin θ ∂Ψ∂ θ ) +
1r2sin2θ
∂ 2Ψ∂ φ 2 +8π 2m E
h2 Ψ = 0
In this equation the wave function Ψ is a function of r, θ,φ
For a rigid rotator r = 1 and potential energy is zero
1
r2 sinθ
∂∂θ ( sin θ
∂Ψ∂ θ ) +
1r2sin 2θ
∂ 2Ψ∂ φ 2 +8 π 2m E
h2 Ψ = 0
1
sinθ ∂
∂θ ( sin θ ∂Ψ∂ θ ) +
1sin2θ
∂ 2Ψ∂ φ 2 +8π 2m E
h2 Ψ = 0
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 43
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
1
sinθ ∂
∂θ ( sin θ ∂Ψ∂ θ ) +
1sin2θ
∂ 2Ψ∂ φ 2 +βΨ = 0 where β = 8π 2m E
h2
1
sinθ [ sin θ ∂2Ψ∂ θ2 +
∂Ψ∂ θ cos θ ]+
1sin2θ
∂ 2Ψ∂ φ 2 +βΨ = 0
∂2Ψ
∂ θ2 + cosθsin θ
∂Ψ∂ θ +
1sin2θ
∂ 2Ψ∂ φ 2 +βΨ = 0
This equation can be separated into two equations , each involving a single independent
variable. and solving these we get
sin2 θ d2 Xdu2 -2 cos θ
dXdu + ( β - m2
sin2θ¿ X = 0
( 1- u2) d2 X
d u2 -2u dXdu + ( β - m2
(1−u2)¿ X = 0 ----------------1 where u = cosθ
This resembles associated Legendre differential equation which is
( 1-x2)∂2 y∂ x2 - 2x
dy∂ x + ( J (J+1) - m2
(1−x 2)¿ X = 0 ---------------------2
comparing 1 and 2 we get
J(J + 1 ) = β
8 π 2m Eh2 = J(J + 1 ) [ β = 8 π 2m E
h2 ]
∴ E = h2
8π 2m J (J+1)
This is the expression for rotational energy level
To find the allowed Energy Levels:
The expression for rotational energy is obtained by solving the Schrodinger equation
The rotational energy is E = h2
8 π 2 IJ(J+1) joules ,
In terms of wave number ∈ = Ehc cm -1 [ E = hϑ,
= h2
8 π2 IJ (J+1)
hc cm -1
= h
8 π 2 I cJ(J+1) cm -1
∈ = B J(J+1) cm -1 where B is rotational constant B =
h8 π 2 I c
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 44
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
when J = 0 , ∈ = 0 (0+1)
= 0
when J = 1 , ∈ = B ( 1+1)
= 2B cm -1
when J = 2 ∈ = 2B ( 2+1)
= 6B cm -1 ,
When J = 3 , ∈ = 12B, When J = 4 , ∈ = 20B
Thus the allowed rotational energy levels are 0. 2B, 6B,12B,20B
To find rotational transitions:(Selection rule):
All transitions in which J changes by one unit are allowed transitions( intense) and
other transitions are forbidden( weak)
∆ J = ± 1 Where J represents Rotational quantum
number. ∆ J = +¿ 1 corresponds to absorption spectrum while ∆ J = −¿1 corresponds
to emission spectrum
If the molecule is raised from the J= 0 to J = 1 by absorbing energy
ϑ J=0 → J = 1 = 2B ( 0+1) cm-1
= 2B cm -1
an absorption line will appear at 2B cm -1
If now the molecule is raised from the J= 1 to J = 2 by absorbing more energy
ϑ J=1 → J = 2 = 2B ( 1+1) cm-
= 4B cm -1 ,
an absorption line will appear at 4B cm -1
To raise the molecule from the state J to J+1, we would have
ϑ J → J+1 = ϑ J+1 - ϑ J
= B (J+1)(J+2) – B J (J+1)
= B (J+1) ( J+2- J) [ taking common factor
outside]
= 2B ( J+1) cm-1
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 45
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
This shows that the distance between the successive spectral line is same which is equal to
2B
Problem-.Calculate the bond length in CO if the atomic mass of C is 12.000, and that of O is
15.999. The moment of inertia of CO is 14.5695 kg m2
Solution:
Moment of inertia I = μ r 02 where μ is reduced mass
∴ r0 = √Iμ
I = 14.5695 kg m2
Reduced mass μ = m1 m2
m1+m 2
= (12×15.999)
12+15.999
= 191.38827.999
= 6. 857
r0 = 14.5695
6.857 = 2. 1247
Problem : The pure rotational spectrum of CN consists of a series of equally spaced
lines separated by 3. 8 cm -1. Calculate the inter nuclear distance of the molecule. reduced
mass = 1.07 × 10 -26 Kg
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 46
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Data:
μ = 1.07 × 10 -26 Kg
spacing between the lines 2B = 3.8 cm -1.
∴ B = 1.9 = h
8 π 2 I c
I = h
8 π 2 B c
= (6.62 ×10−34)
8 × (3.14 )2 (1.9 )(3 ×1010)
= 1.47 × 10 -46 Kg m2
I = μ r 2
∴ r = √ Iμ
= 117 pm
Problem- The bond length of NO molecule is 1.151 × 10 -10 m. Calculate the frequency in cm
-1 for the pure rotational levels in the spectrum of NO corresponding to the following
changes in the rotational quantum number 0 →1, 1 →2 , and 2→ 3
Reduced mass μ = m1 m2
m1+m 2
= 14+1614 ×16 ×
16.023× 1023
= 1.24 × 10 -26 Kg
Moment of inertia I = μ r 2
= (1.24 × 10 -26 ) ( 1.151 × 10 -10 ) 2
= 1.426 × 10 -46 Kg m2
Rotational constant B = h
8 π 2 I c
= 6.62× 10−34
8 ×3.141× 3.1411.426 × 10−46× 3 ×108 × 10 -2 cm -1
= 1.956 cm -1
To obtain the frequency
ϑ J → J+1 = 2B ( J+1) cm-1
ϑ 0 → 1 = ( 2 ) ( 1.956) ( 0 + 1)
= 3.912 cm-1
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 47
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
ϑ 1→ 2 = ( 2 ) ( 1.956) ( 1 + 1)
= 7.824 cm-1
ϑ 2 → 3 = ( 2 ) ( 1.956) ( 2 + 1)
= 11.736 cm-1
Frequency separation:
The rotational spectrum of a rigid diatomic molecule consists of a series of lines at 2B,
4B, 6B, 8B etc . these lines are equally spaced by an amount of 2B , called frequency
separation.
Problem The reduced mass of CO, whose bond length 1.13 A , is 1.14 × 10 -26 Kg.
Calculate the energy of the molecule in the first excited state.
Data: r = 1.13 A
μ = 1.14 × 10 -26 Kg
J= 1
E = h2
8π 2 IJ(J+1) joules ,
I = μ r 2
= (1.14 × 10 -26 Kg ) ( 1.13 × 10 -10 m )2
= 1.46 × 10 -46 Kg –m2
E = (6.62 ×10−34)2
8 × (3.14 )2¿¿ [ 1( 1+1)]
= 7.61 × 10 -23 joule
24 ROTATIONAL SPECTROSCOPY OF NON RIGID ROTOR
The non – rigid rotator is one in which
1.The bond between the atom is elastic ( non- rigid)
2.The distance between the atoms is not constant.
Consider a diatomic molecule as non - rigid rotator. A rotating molecule having a
permanent dipole moment generates an electric field which interacts with the electric
component of the Microwave.
TO FIND THE ALLOWED ENERGY LEVELS:
The expression for rotational energy is obtained by solving the Schrodinger equation
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 48
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
The rotational energy is given by E = BJ (J+1) - DJ2 (J+1)2
D is called centrifugal distortion constant D = h3
32 π4 I 2r2 kc cm -1`
when J = 0 , ∈ = 0
when J = 1 ∈ = B(1) ( 1+1) - D (1)2 (1+1)2
= 2B - 4D
when J = 2 ∈ = B(2) ( 2+1) - D (2)2 (2+1)2
= 6B - 36D
when J = 3 ∈ = B(3) ( 3+1) - D (3)2 (3+1)2
=126B - 108D
Thus the allowed rotational energy levels are 2B-4D 6B-36D,12B -108D
To raise the molecule from the state J to J+1, we would have
E J → J+1 = E J+1 - E J
= [ B(J+1) (J+1+1 ) – D(J+1) 2 (J+1+1)2 ] - [ B J (J+1) - DJ2 (J+1)2 ]
= [ B(J+1) (J+2 ) – D(J+1) 2 (J+2)2 ] - [ B J (J+1) - DJ2 (J+1)2 ]
= [ B(J+1) (J+2 ) – B J (J+1) ] – [ D(J+1) 2 (J+2)2 - DJ2 (J+1)2 ]
[ grouping]
= B(J+1) [ (J+2) – J ] – [ D(J+1) 2 [ (J+2)2 -J2 ] [ taking common factor
outside]
= B(J+1) [2 ] – [ D(J+1) 2 [ J2 + 4J +4 -J2]
= 2B(J+1) – [ D(J+1) 2 [4J +4 ]
= 2B(J+1) – [ D(J+1) 2 4(J +1) ]
= 2B(J+1) – 4D(J+1)3
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 49
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
This shows that at higher J value the rotational energy levels have lesser energy than that of
rigid
rotator.
Selection rule :
All transitions in which J changes by one unit are allowed transitions( intense) and
other transitions are forbidden( weak) ∆ J = ± 1 Where J represents Rotational
quantum number. The spectrum of non- rigid rotator is similar to that of rigid molecule ,
except that each spectral line will undergo displacement towards low frequency value.
34 ROTATIONAL SPECTROSCOPY OF DIATOMIC MOLECULES
44 ROTATIONAL SPECTROSCOPY OF POLY ATOMIC MOLECULES
1. LINEAR POLY ATOMIC MOLECULES
Example Carbon oxy sulphide (COS ) , HCN,
1. It can be treated as diatomic molecules
2. The transition from one rotational state to other is governed by
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 50
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
a. ∆E = hϑ ( Bohr quantum condition)
b. ∆J =± 1
c. molecule must have permanent diplole moment
To find the allowed Energy Levels:
The expression for rotational energy is obtained by solving the Schrodinger equation
The rotational energy is E = h2
8 π 2 IJ(J+1) joules ,
In terms of wave number ∈ = Ehc cm -1 [ E = hϑ,
= h2
8 π2 IJ (J+1)
hc cm -1
= h
8 π 2 I cJ(J+1) cm -1
∈ = B J(J+1) cm -1 where B is rotational constant B =
h8 π 2 I c
3. The rotational spectra of linear poly atomic molecule consists of set of equally spaced
lines.
The spacing between the spectrum gives 2B value from which B can be found out.
Rotational constant B = h
8 π 2 I c
4.For a molecule with ‘n’ atoms, there are (n-1) unknown internuclear distances
For a triatomic molecule there are 2 bond distances to be determined. but from the spectrum,
only one moment of inertia can be obtained. Therefore microwave spectra of (n-1) different
isotopic species are recorded.
TYPES OF ROTATIONS
There are three types of rotation
1. Rotation about bond axis( moment of inertia Ia )
2. End-over- end on the plane (moment of inertia Ib)
3. End-over- end at right angle to the plane (moment of inertia Ic)
For Linear molecules
1.Mmoment of inertia about the molecular axis is zero Ia = 0
2. Ib = Ic
3.Example : CO,HCl, HCN, N2O,C2H2, OCS
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 51
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
2. NON- LINEAR POLY ATOMIC MOLECULES
Classification of molecules based on inertia moments
Depending on the relative size of the inertia moments, rotors can de divided into four classes.
1.Linear rotors
For a linear molecule IA << IB = IC.
For most purposes IA can taken to be zero. For a linear molecule the separation of lines in the rotational spectrum can be related directly to the moment of inertia of the molecule. Since the moment of inertia is quadratic in the bond lengths, the microwave spectrum yields the bond lengths directly, provided the atomic masses are known.
Examples of linear molecules are obviously the diatomics such as oxygen (O=O), carbon monoxide (C≡O), and nitrogen (N≡N). But also many triatoms are linear: carbon dioxide (O=C=O), hydrogen cyanide (HC≡N), and carbonyl sulfide (O=C=S). Examples of larger linear molecules arechloroethyne (HC≡CCl), and acetylene (HC≡CH).
2.]Symmetric tops
A symmetric top is a rotor in which two moments of inertia are the same.
There are two classes of symmetric tops, oblate symmetric tops (frisbee or disc shaped) with IA = IB < IC and prolate symmetric tops (cigar shaped) with IA < IB = IC.
Symmetric tops have a three-fold or higher rotational symmetry axis.
Examples of oblate symmetric tops are: benzene (C6H6), cyclobutadiene (C4H4), and ammonia (NH3). Prolate tops are: chloroform(CHCl3) and methylacetylene (CH3C≡CH).
3.Spherical tops
A spherical top molecule is a special case of a symmetric tops with equal moment of inertia about all three axes IA = IB = IC.
The spherical top molecules have cubic symmetry.
Examples of spherical tops are: methane (CH4), phosphorus tetramer (P4), carbon tetrachloride (CCl4), ammonium ion (NH4
+), and uranium hexafluoride (UF6).
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 52
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
4.Asymmetric tops
A rotor is an asymmetric top if all three moments of inertia are different.
Most of the larger molecules are asymmetric tops. For such molecules a simple interpretation of the microwave spectrum usually is not possible.
.
Examples of asymmetric tops: anthracene (C14H10), water (H2O), and nitrogen dioxide (NO2).
On the basis of moment of inertia of molecules, non – linear molecules are classified as
1. Spherical top molecules: ( Ia = Ib = Ic)
1. In these molecules all the three moment of inertia are equal.
2. As these molecules are not polar, no rotational spectrum will be obtained.
3. Example CH4, CCl4 , SF6
2.. Symmetric top molecules:
1. These molecules have equal moments of inertia about two axis of rotation while the
moment of inertia about the remaining axis is not equal to either of the other two.
2. If Ia = Ib < Ic the molecules are said to be prolate
Example: CHCl3, CHCI3, CH3F
3 . If Ia = Ib > Ic the molecules are said to be oblate
Example NH3,BF3,
3. Asymmetric top molecules
All the three moments of inertia are different ( Ia ≠ Ib ≠ Ic )
Example H2O,SO2,
Differences between Micro wave spectra and IR spectra
Microwave spectra IR
1 characteristics of the molecule as a
whole
IR is of functional group of absorbing molecule
2 The substance must be gas for IR it may be solid ,liquid or gas
3 It is absorption spectra IR is absorption or emission
Limitations of Micro wave spectra
1. Molecule must have permanent dipole moment.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 53
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
2. Sample should be gas
B. VIBRATIONAL SPECTROSCOPY-
111 HARMONIC OSCILLATOR
The vibratory motion of a diatomic molecule is similar to that of vibration of
harmonic oscillator. In such an oscillator restoring force (the force tending to restore the
atom to its original state ), is directly proportional to displacement. of the atom. If F is the
restoring force and x’ is the displacement of the atom then
F ∝ x
F = - k x here ‘k’ is known as force constant. This is known as Hooks law
EXPRESSION FOR ENERGY LEVELS:
The potential energy of such system is k x2
2
.Energy of such system is obtained by solving Schrodinger equation
E = hγ ( v + 12)
Where v – vibrational quantum number and γ – vibrational frequency.
To convert the energy from joules to cm – 1
G(v) = Ehc
= (v+½)hγ
hc
= ( v+ ½ ) we
Where we is called equilibrium vibrational frequency.
1. The lowest energy of the oscillator , is called ground state energy or zero point energy and
is obtained by putting n = 0, in the above expression.
E0 = 12 h γ E1 =
32 h γ,
E2 = 52 h γ, E3 =
72 h γ
3. The difference in energies of successive energy levels are E1 – E0 = h γ ,
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 54
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
E2 – E1 = h γ ,
This shows the successive energy levels are equally spaced. The separation between
two adjacent energy levels being hγ.
Diagram:
The vibrational frequency is given by γ = 1
2 πc (kμ) ½ cm -1
where μ is reduced masses and k is force constant
selection rule
The selection rule for vibrational transition in the SHO is dv = ± 1
i.e the vibrational quantum number changes by unity.
vibrational transition
Using the selection rule , the frequency of vibrational transition is given by
∆γ = G ( v → v+ 1 )
= ( v + 1 + ½ ) we - ( v+ ½ ) we
= we
This transition from v= 0 to v= 1 is called fundamental vibrational frequency.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 55
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
211 ANHORMONICITY
PURE VIBRATIONAL SPECTROSCOPY -ANHORMONIC OSCILLATOR
Real molecules do not obey Hooks law because the bonds in the real molecule is
considered to be perfectly elastic. So they can be considered as anharmonic oscillator. In
such a case the potential energy is given by
V = De ( 1- eβx ) 2
Where De is dissociation energy and β is rotational constant.
This is known as Morse equation. Energy of such system is obtained by solving
Schrodinger equation.
E = hγ ( v + 12) - hγ ( v +
12) 2 xe
Where v – vibrational quantum number and γ – vibrational frequency. xe is anharmonicity
constant.
selection rule
The selection rule for the transition in the anharmonic oscillator is
dv = ± 1, ± 2, ± 3,….
The transition frequency is given by
∆γ = v [ 1- (v+1) xe ] cm – 1
where ‘v’ represents the vibrational quantum number of the final state.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 56
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
The transition from v= 0 to v= 1 is called fundamental vibrational frequency.
∆γ = ± 1
∆γ = (1) ( 1- (1+1) xe ) cm – 1
= ( 1- 2 xe ) cm – 1
311 VIBRATION – ROTATION SPECTRA OF DIATOMIC VIBRATING
MOLECULES
Rotational–vibrational spectroscopy is concerned with infrared and Raman
spectra of molecules in the gas phase.
Transitions involve changes in both vibrational and rotational states
When such transitions emit or absorb photons , the frequency is proportional to the difference
in energy levels
Since changes in rotational energy levels are typically much smaller than changes in
vibrational energy levels, changes in rotational state are said to give fine structure to the
vibrational spectrum.
For a given vibrational transition, the same theoretical treatment as for pure rotational
spectroscopy gives the rotational quantum numbers, energy levels, and selection rules.
In linear and spherical top molecules, rotational lines are found as simple progressions at both
higher and lower frequencies relative to the pure vibration frequency.
In symmetric top molecules the transitions are classified as parallel when the dipole
moment change is parallel to the principal axis of rotation, and perpendicular when the
change is perpendicular to that axis.
411SELECTION RULES-
The selection rule has two consequences.
1. Both the vibrational and rotational quantum numbers must change. The transition :∆ v =± 1, ∆J = 0 (Q-branch) is forbidden
2. The energy change of rotation can be either subtracted from or added to the energy change of vibration, giving the P- and R- branches of the spectrum, respectively.
selection rule is ∆ v =± 1, ∆J = ±1
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 57
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
511P,Q AND R BRANCHES IN VIBRATIONAL SPECTRA
VIBRATION – ROTATION SPECTRA OF DIATOMIC MOLECULES
When a molecule absorbs radiation, which is enough to cause change in vibrational
energy , its rotational energy may also change..Hence, the absorption band contains , number
of closely spaced lines . Such type of spectrum is referred to as vibration- rotation
spectrum.
The rotational energy is given by E = BJ (J+1) - DJ2 (J+1)2
where B is rotational constant B = h
8 π 2 I c
Vibrational energy is given by E = hγ ( v + 12) - hγ ( v +
12) 2 xe
Where v – vibrational quantum number
γ – vibrational frequency.
xe - anharmonicity constant
The total energy of the vibrating rotator is given by the sum of the vibrational and
rotational energies. Etotal = Evib+ Erot
= hγ ( v + 12) xe + BJ (J+1) - hγ ( v +
12) 2 - DJ2 (J+1)2
The first term corresponds to a anharmonic oscillator
The second term corresponds to rigid rotor,
The third term corresponds to harmonicity
The fourth term corresponds to centrifugal distortion.
Thus, the vibrational spectrum does not occur in a single line
but a number of lines appear on either side of the expected position.
These are named as P,Q and R branches.
P- BRANCH:
When transition occurs such a way that v → v+1 and J → J+1, The energy change is
∆E = [ hγ ( v +1 + 12) + B (J+1)( J+1+1) ] - [ hγ ( v +
12) + B J(J+1) ]
Rearranging
= [ hγ ( v +1 + 12) - hγ ( v +
12) ] + [ B (J+1)( J+2 ) - B J(J+1) ]
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 58
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
= [ hγ ( v +1 + 12 - v -
12) ] + B (J+1) [ J+2 - J]
= hγ(1) + B (J+1) (2)
= hγ +2 B (J+1)
These lines are named as P- branch
selection rule is ∆ v = 1, ∆J = +1
R- BRANCH:
When transition occurs such a way that v → v+1 and J+1 → J
The energy change is
∆E = hγ ( v +1 + 12) - hγ ( v +
12) + B J(J+1) - B (J+1)( J+2)
Rearranging
= hγ ( v +1 + 12 - v-
12) + B (J+1) [ J –J-2]
= hγ - 2B (J+1)
These lines are named as R- branch
selection rule is ∆ v = 1, ∆J = -1
Q- BRANCH:
In linear polyatomic molecules, selection rule is ∆ v = 1, ∆J = 0
. The frequency for such transition is γ = γ0
Vibration type Selection rule Frequency of transition Band contour
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 59
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
1 Parallel ∆ v = 1, ∆J = ±1 γ = γ0 ±2mBJ P,R
2 Perpendicular ∆ v = 1, ∆J = 0 γ = γ0 P,R,Q
611VIBRATIONAL SPECTRA OF POLYATOMIC MOLECULES-
The molecule having ‘n’ atoms have ‘3n ‘ degrees of freedom.
Translational ( T) + rotational(R ) + vibrational (V) = 3n
Linear:
A linear poly atomic molecule having ‘n’ atoms can have 3 translational degrees of
freedom. 2 rotational degrees of freedom.
Translational ( T) + rotational(R ) + vibrational (V) = 3n
3+2 + Vibrational degree of freedom = 3n
= 3n -5
For example carbon dioxide is a linear molecule.
number of vibrational modes = 3n-5
= 3(3) – 5
= 4
Non – linear:
A non linear molecule poly atomic molecule having ‘n’ atoms can have 3
translational degrees of freedom and 3 rotational degrees of freedom
3+3 + Vibrational degree of freedom = 3n
Vibrational degree of freedom = 3n -6
For example water is a non –linear molecule
number of vibrational modes = 3n-6 [ ‘n’ is the number of atoms]
= 3(3) – 6
= 3
Problem: Find the number of vibrational modes of oxygen and benzene
Solution:
Since oxygen is a linear molecule number of vibrational modes of oxygen and benzene
= 3n-5
= 3(2) – 5
= 1
vibrational modes of benzene = 3n-6
= 3(12)- 6
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 60
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
= 30
711FUNDAMENTAL VIBRATIONS
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 61
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
The excitation from the ground state(v= 0) to the lowest excited state (v= 1) is known
as fundamental vibration and the frequency at which it takes place is called fundamental
vibrational frequency
The transition from v= 0 to v= 1 is called fundamental vibrational frequency.
E = hγ ( v + 12) - hγ ( v +
12) 2 xe
Where ‘xe’ is anharmonicity constant
∆E = hγ { [ ( 1 + 12) - ( 1 +
12) 2 xe ] - [ ( 0 +
12) - ( 0 +
12) 2 xe ] }
= hγ { [ 32) - (
32 ) 2 xe ] - [ (
12) - (
12) 2 xe ] }
= hγ ( 32 -
94
xe - 12 +
14
xe )
= hγ { ( 32 -
12) - (
94 -
14 ) xe }
= hγ ( 1 - 2 xe ) cm – 1
fundamental vibrational frequency = ( 1 - 2 xe ) cm – 1
811NORMAL MODES OF VIBRATION
1. Stretching vibrations:
These are the movements of atoms along the bond axis such that the inter atomic
distance is increases or decreases
a. Symmetrical stretching vibrations:
When the stretching and compression occur in a symmetrical fashion we call it
symmetrical stretching. Here there is no change in bond angle.
For example in CH2 , the H- atoms move away from the central carbon atom without
change in bond angle.
b. Asymmetrical stretching
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 62
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
When one bond is compressing while the other is stretching , it is called un
symmetrical stretching
2. Bending Vibration:
If a vibration causes change in bond angles between bonds with a common atom , it
is called bending vibration. It is of two types.
A. In plane bending.
1. Scissoring:
Here the two atoms joined to a central atom move towards each other or away from
each other, then it is called Scissoring.(Like scissor)
Towards each other away from each other
2. Rocking:
Here the both atoms joined to a central atom move same side in the same plane
B. Out of plane bending
1.. Wagging:
Here the both atoms joined to a central atom move same side in out of plane
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 63
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
2. Twisting :
Here the structural unit rotates about the bond in out of plane
911OVERTONES,
If transition takes place from ground level( v= 0) to any state other than v= 1 , then
the bands obtained are called overtones. In overtones vibrational quantum number changes
by ±2, ±3 etc
The transition frequency is given by
∆γ = v [ 1- (v+1) xe ] cm – 1
The transition from v= 0 to v= 2 is called first overtone.( second anharmonic)
∆γ = ± 2
E = hγ ( v + 12) - hγ ( v +
12) 2 xe
Where ‘xe’ is anharmonicity constant
∆E = hγ { [ ( 2 + 12) - ( 2 +
12) 2 xe ] - [ ( 0 +
12) - ( 0 +
12) 2 xe ] }
= hγ { [ 52) - (
52) 2 xe ] - [ (
12) - (
12) 2 xe ] }
= hγ ( 52 -
254
xe - 12 +
14
xe )
= hγ { ( 52 -
12) - (
254 -
14 ) xe }
= hγ { 2 - 6 xe }
Frequency of first overtone = 2 ( 1 - 3 xe ) cm – 1
The transition from v= 0 to v= 3 is called second overtone.( third anharmonic)
∆γ = ± 3
∆E = hγ { [ ( 3 + 12) - ( 3 +
12) 2 xe ] - [ ( 0 +
12) - ( 0 +
12) 2 xe ] }
= hγ { [ 72) - (
72 ) 2 xe ] - [ (
12) - (
12) 2 xe ] }
= hγ ( 72 -
494
xe - 12 +
14
xe )
= hγ { ( 72 -
12) - (
494 -
14 ) xe }
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 64
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
= hγ { 3 - 12 xe }
Frequency of first overtone = 3 ( 1 - 4 xe ) cm – 1
The transition from v= 0 to v= 4 is called third overtone.
∆γ = ± 4
= 3(1- 5xe ) cm
As the frequencies of the first and second overtone bands are 2 to 3 times the frequency of
the fundamental , they appear in the region of shorter wavelength as compared to the
fundamental band.
1011COMBINATION AND DIFFERENCE BANDS-
When two vibrational frequencies of a molecule couple to give a new frequency and
such frequency is IR active then the new frequency is called combinational frequency.
If γ1 and γ2 are the two frequencies combined then the frequency of combination
band is
γcomb = γ1 + γ2
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 65
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
If the observed frequency of the combination is equal to the difference between them,
then the band is called difference band
If γ1 and γ2 are the two frequencies combined then the frequency of difference band
is
γdiff = γ1 - γ2
1111FERMI RESONANCE.
Resonance means for small vibration large amplitude
The shifting of energies and intensities of absorption bands in an IR spectra or
Raman spectra is called Fermi resonance.
Causes: it takes place due to mixing of fundamental vibration mode and overtone
Condition: the modes should have equal energy
Fermi resonance in CO2
CO2 has four vibrational modes ( 3n-5)
1. Asymmetric stretching : it shows a band at 1337 cm -1 .
2. Symmetric stretching : It does not make chang in dipole moment. Therefore no band
appears for this mode
3. The two bending vibrations in CO2 are equivalent and absorb at same frequency 667
cm -1.
4. The overtone = 2x
= 2 ( 667)
= 1334 cm -1
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 66
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
since the overtone has same energy (1334 cm -1 ) as the fundamental mode( 1337 cm -1 ) ,
mixing of modes take place , causing the shift towards higher frequency.
Due to the effect of Fermi resonance the first band shifts towards higher frequency and give
rise to two bands at 1285 and 1388 cm -1
CO2
In CO2, the bending vibration ν2 (667 cm−1) has symmetry Πu. The first excited state of ν2 is
denoted 0110 (no excitation in the ν1 mode, one quantum of excitation in the ν2 bending mode
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 67
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
with angular momentum about the molecular axis equal to ±1, no excitation in the ν3 mode)
and clearly transforms according to the irreducible representation Πu. Putting two quanta into
the ν2 mode leads to a state with components of symmetry (Πu × Πu)+ = Σ+g+ Δ g. These are
called 0200 and 0220, respectively. 0200 has the same symmetry (Σ+g) and a very similar
energy to the first excited state of v1 denoted 100 (one quantum of excitation in the
ν1 symmetric stretch mode, no excitation in the ν2 mode, no excitation in the ν3 mode). The
calculated unperturbed frequency of 100 is 1337 cm−1, and, ignoring anharmonicity, the
frequency of 0200 is 1334, twice the 667 cm−1 of 0110. The states 0200 and 100 can therefore
mix, producing a splitting and also a significant increase in the intensity of the 0200
transition, so that both the 0200 and 100 transitions have similar intensities.
C. RAMAN SPECTRA:
17 CLASSICAL THEORY OF RAMAN EFFECT
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 68
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
When mono chromatic light falls on a polarisable substance, the light gets scattered.
When external electric field is applied, it induces a dipole moment( μ ) in the molecule
which is given by
μ = α E where α – Polarisability E – Electric field --------------1
The electric field is given by
E = E0 Sin γt
Polarisability α = α0 + ∂ α∂ q Sin γmt
Substituting in equation 1 we get
𝛍 = ( α0 + ∂ α∂ q Sin γmt ) E0 Sin γt [substituting in 2 ]
= α0 E0 Sin γt + α0 ∂ α∂ q E0 Sin γmt Sin γt
= α0 E0 Sin γt + ½ ∂ α∂ q [cos(γm –γ) + cos(γm + γ) [ Sin A SinB = ½ [ cos (A-B)
- cos (A+B)]
. 1. If the vibration does not change the polarisability of the molecule then ∂ α∂ q = 0, Then the
above equation becomes 𝛍 = α0 E0 Sin γt . The dipole oscillates only at the frequency of
incident radiation.
Raman shift is given by (γm –γ) and ( γm +γ)
Thus the oscillating dipole has three distinct frequency components
Hence Raman spectra of a vibrating molecule consists of an intense band at
incident frequency and two weak bands one above and one below that of the intense band.
stokes lines Rayleigh scattering antistoke lines
γex > γ γex = γ γex < γ
Raman scattering
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 69
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
27MOLECULAR POLARISABILITY
applications of electric field on polarisable molecule causes dipole moment in the
system. The magnitude of this induced moment will be proportional to the electric field
applied.
Dipole moment μ = α E
Where α is proportionality constant called polarisability and is defined as the electric dipole
induced in the molecular system by a unit electric field.
37PURE ROTATIONAL RAMAN SPECTRA
The selection rule for rotational Raman transitions is ∆J =0, ±2 where ∆J =0
corresponds to Rayleigh scattering. The rotational energy E = h2
8 π 2 IJ(J+1) joules ,
------------------------1h
In terms of wave number ∈ = Ehc cm -1 [ E = hϑ],
= h2
8 π2 IJ (J+1)
hc cm -1
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 70
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
= h
8 π 2 I cJ(J+1) cm -1
= B J(J+1) cm -1 where B is rotational constant B = h
8π 2 I c
Imagine the molecule to be in the J= 0 state ( ground state). Let the incident radiation be
absorbed to raise it to the J= 1 state. The energy absorbed will be ∈ J=2 - ∈ J=0 = B 2(2+1) - B (0)(0+1)
= 6B – 0
= 6B cm -1 and therefore ,
ϑ J=0 → J = 2 = 6B cm -1 , in other words an absorption line will appear at 6B cm -1 If now the
molecule is raised from the J= 1 to J = 3 by absorbing more energy∈ J=2 - ∈ J=0 = B 3(3+1) - B (1)(1+1)
= 12 B – 2B
= 10 B
and therefore , ϑ J=0 → J = 2 = 10B cm -1 , so, there will be a line at 10B cm-1
The energy separation between successive Raman lines = 10 B – 6B
= 4B
In general , to raise the molecule from the state J to J+2, we would have
ϑ J → J+2 = B (J+2)(J+2 +1 ) – B J (J+1)
= B (J+2)(J+3 ) – B J (J+1)
= B [ J2 + 5J +6 – J2 - J ]
= B [4J +6 ]
Lines arising from these energy changes are referred to as S branch lines( stokes lines)
If the frequency of the incident light is γ ex
For stokes lines γ s J →J + 2 = γ ex - B [4J +6 ]
For antistoke lines γ A J + 2 → J = γ ex + B [4J +6 ]
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 71
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
O – BRANCH ( ANTISTOKES ) Q-BRANCH S- BRANCH ( STOKES LINES)
Rotational Raman lines of linear molecules have nearly double the spacing of the
microwave rotational spectral lines for the same molecule.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 72
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
47 VIBRATIONAL RAMAN SPECTRA
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 73
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
VIBRATIONAL – ROTATIONAL RAMAN SPECTRA: [ O, Q and S BRANCHES
IN RAMAN SPECTRA]
When a molecule absorbs radiation, which is enough to cause change in vibrational
energy , its rotational energy may also change..Hence the absorption band due to vibrational
energy change will contain number of closely spaced lines due to change in rotational
energy. Such type of Raman spectrum is referred to as vibration- rotation Raman spectrum.
The total energy of the vibrating rotator is given by the sum of the vibrational and
rotational energies. Etotal = Evib+ Erot
= hγ ( v + 12) + B J(J+1)
Thus the vibrational spectrum does not occur in a single line but a number of lines
appear on either side of the expected position. These are named as O,Q and S branches.
selection rule for Raman spectra is ∆ v = 1, ∆J = ± 2
O- BRANCH:
When transition occurs such a way that v → v+1 and J → J+2, The energy change is
∆E = hγ ( v +1 + 12) + B (J+2)( J+2+1) - hγ ( v +
12) + B J(J+1)
= hγ ( v +1 + 12) - hγ ( v +
12) + B (J+2)( J+3) - B J(J+1)
= hγ ( v +1 + 12 - v-
12) + B[ J2 + 5J + 6 - J2 - J]
= hγ + B (4J+ 6)
These lines are named as O- branch
selection rule is ∆ v = 1, ∆J = +2
Q- BRANCH:
In linear polyatomic molecules, apart from oscillations of dipole parallel to the bond
axis , they produce oscillatory dipoles perpendicular to the bond axis.
In such a case selection rule is ∆ v = 1, ∆J = 0
. The frequency for such transition is γ = γ0
∆E = hγ ( v +1 + 12) + B (J)( J+1) - hγ ( v +
12) - B J(J+1)
= hγ
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 74
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
S- BRANCH:
When transition occurs such a way that v+1 → v and J+2 → J The energy change is
∆E = hγ ( v + 12) - hγ ( v +1 +
12) + B J(J+1) - B (J+2)( J+3)
= - hγ ( v +1 + 12 - v-
12) + B[ J2 + J - J2 - 5J - 6 ]
= - hγ - B (4J+6)
These lines are named as S- branch
selection rule is ∆ v = 1, ∆J = -2
. Spectral lines are displaced by 6B, 10B, to higher frequency than fundamental frequency.
∆ v = +1 ∆ v = +1 ∆ v = +1
∆J = +2 ∆J = 0 ∆J = -2
57ROTATIONAL FINE STRUCTURE
Fine structure, is the splitting of the main spectral lines of an atom into two or more
components, each representing a slightly different wavelength.
Fine structure is produced when an atom emits light in making the transition from
one energy state to another.
67RULE OF MUTUAL EXCLUSION
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 75
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
If a molecule has centre of symmetry, the Raman active vibrations are IR inactive and
Vice versa. If there is no centre of symmetry then some vibrations (not all) may be both
Raman and IR active.
77POLARIZATION OF LIGHT AND RAMAN EFFECTRAMAN SPECTRA
Light waves which have vibrations in all directions are called unpolarised light.
When passed through Nicol prism, this light can be changed in to one which have vibrations
in only one direction. These are called polarised light.The phenomenon of conversion of
unpolarised light in to polarized light is known as polarization.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 76
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
IR RAMAN
1. Spectra is due to absorption of light Due to scattering of light
2. Permanent dipole moment is necessary condition Polarisability is necessary condition
3. Water can not be used as solvent because it is opaque Can be used
4. Homo nuclear diatomic molecules like H2,O2,N2,F2,I2
are IR in active because they do not have Permanent
dipole moment
Homo nuclear diatomic molecules like
H2,O2,N2,F2,I2 .. are Raman active
because they are polarisable.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 77
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
RAMAN EFFECT
when a light beam is deflected by molecules there occurs a change in the wavelength of light. This is known as Raman effect
. When a beam of light passes through, transparent sample of a chemical compound, a small fraction of the light emerges in directions other than that of the incident (incoming) beam. A small part, has wavelengths different from that of the incident light; its presence is a result of the Raman effect
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 78
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
UNIT IIISPECTROSCOPY – III
1. Resonance spectroscopy
2. Zeeman effect
3. Equation of motion of spin in magnetic fields
4. Chemical shift
5. Spin-spin coupling
6. NMR of simple AX and AMX type molecules-
7. H1 NMR
8. 13C - NMR
9. 19F- NMR
10. 31P NMR spectra
11. A brief qualitative discussion of Fourier Transform spectroscopy
12. ESR: principle
13. Spin-orbit coupling.
14. Hyperfine interaction.
15. McConnell relation.
16. Mass spectra: Theory and instrumentation,
17. McLaffetry rearrangement
18. Fragmentation pattern for simple aliphatic and aromatic alkanes
19. Fragmentation pattern for alcohols
20. Fragmentation pattern for aldehydes and ketones.-
21. Mossbauer spectroscopy-
22. Doppler effect
23. Isomer shift
24. Electron-neutron hyperfine interactions.
25. Quadrupole interactions and Magnetic interactions.
125 .Resonance spectroscopy
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 79
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
The reinforcement by the synchronous vibration of a neighboring object is
called resonance
If the spectra is obtained by the resonance technique it is called resonance
spectra
1. Nuclear Magnetic Resonance spectra[ NMR]
2. Electron Spin Resonance spectra[ESR]
3. Nuclear Quadrapole Resonance spectra[NQR]
225 . Zeeman effect:
1. The splitting of spectral lines, in the presence of applied magnetic field is called
Zeeman effect.
2. This effect arises / as a result of interaction between / applied magnetic field / and the
magnetic moment /associated with electron spin.
3. The field splits the line with a given J value in to ( 2J+1) levels.
For example if J = 1
The number of lines observed = 2 (1) + 1
= 3
If J = 2 , The number of lines observed = 2 (2) + 1
= 5
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 80
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
4 If the term is singlet , it is called normal Zeeman effect.
5. If it is multiplet ( doublet, triplet) it is called anomalous Zeeman effect. The anomalous
effect appears on transitions where the net spin of the electrons is an odd half-integer, so that
the number of Zeeman sub-levels is even.
6. When the spectral lines are absorption lines, the effect is called inverse zeeman effect.
7. Transition is governed by selection rule ∆m = 0 ,± 1
Selection rules.
Transition of electrons are not observed between all pairs of energy levels. Some
transitions are "forbidden" ( i.e., highly improbable) while others are "allowed" by a set of
rules called selection rules
Any electron transition which involves the emission of a photon must involve a
change of 1 in the angular momentum. total angular momentum may change by either zero or
one
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 81
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
8. At even-higher field strength, when the strength of the external field is comparable to the
strength of the atom's internal field, electron coupling is disturbed and the spectral lines
rearrange. This is called the Paschen-Back effect
Find the number of transitions occur when ‘l’ changes from ‘1’ to ‘2’ under magnetic field
Solution: ‘l = 1 ’ level splits in to -1,0,1‘l = 2 ’ level splits in to -2, -1,0,1,2
Possible transitions 1. +2 to +1 ∆m = 2-1
= 12. +1 to +1 ∆m = 1-1
= 03. +1 to 0 ∆m = 1-0
= 14. 0 to +1 ∆m = 0-1
= -15. 0 to 0 ∆m = 0-0
= 06. 0 to -1 ∆m = 0-(-1)
= +17. -1 to -1 ∆m = -1-(-1)
= 08. -1 to 0 ∆m = -1- 0
= -19. -2 to -1 ∆m = -2- (-1)
= -1
There are nine transitions consistent with the selection rule.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 82
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 83
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
3
25EQUATION OF MOTION OF SPIN/ IN MAGNETIC FIELDS
1. When an object rotates , this action generates , an intrinsic angular momentum.
2. If there were no friction in air , the object would spin forever.
3. This intrinsic angular momentum is, a vector and thus spin is also a vector.
4. If the object is spinning from right to left, then the spin vector is pointing up;
Imagine a current loop lying in a plane
If the loop has current I and an enclosed area A, then the magnetic moment is the
product of the current and area , with the direction n̂ parallel to the normal direction of the
plane.
μ→
= I × A× n̂
To derive an equation of motion
we can relate the time derivative of the angular momentum to the torque
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 84
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
In the presence of a magnetic field, the torque is the cross-product of the magnetic moment µ
→ and the magnetic field B →
we can write down a first order differential equation of the magnetic moment which describes
the motion of a spin:.
This represents part of the Bloch equation and leads to the description of the precession of a
spin in the presence of a magnetic field. This equation tells us that the rate of change of µ →
depends on B → and that its motion is perpendicular to both µ → and B → .
-------------------------- NOT FOR EXAMINATION--------------------
The torque due to a constant magnetic field is to be calculated for a circular loop with radius R and current I centered in the x-y plane . Let the field lie in the y-z plane and have magnitude B. The differential torque on d → can be written as:
Using double cross-product formula The “BAC-CAB” rule is A → × (B → × C → ) = B → (A → ⋅ C → ) − C → (A → ⋅ B → )
The magnetic field and the cylindrical unit vectors shown in Fig
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 85
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
------------------1
An integration of the above equation over the polar angle φ, with φ^ from equation 1, gives the total torque.
----------------2
The average value of sin2 φ or cos2 φ over any multiple of π/2 is 1/2.
Equation 2 is exactly µ → × B → in view of the fact that the magnetic dipole moment for the circular loop of Figure is
-------------------------- NOT FOR EXAMINATION--------------------
425 CHEMICAL SHIFT
The shift in the positions of NMR signals which arise due to shielding or
deshielding of protons is called chemical shift.
Chemical shift (δ ) = change∈the frequency
operating frequency∈mega cycles
= (γ sample – γ reference)
operating frequency∈mega cycles.
TetraMethylSilane (TMS) is used as reference, whose formula is ( CH3)4Si
It is designated as “τ” or in ppm
Factors affecting the chemical shift:
A. Intramolecular factors:
1. Electronegativity( shielding and deshielding)
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 86
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
If electro negative atom is present in a compound, it pulls the electron cloud
towards itself and hence the proton gets deshielded ( less shielded) therefore the peak will
be shifted towards high value
For example the methyl proton in CH3I gives peak with a chemical shift value of 2.1ppm
whereas CH3F will give at 4.2 ppm. This is due to higher electro negativity of F
NMR of CH3I NMR of CH3F
2. Substitutional effect:
If the electro negative atom is more , then the proton will be deshielded more and
chemical shift will be more
For example the CH3 protons in methyl chloride gives peak with a chemical shift value
of 3.3ppm
whereas CHCl3 will give at 7.3 ppm. This is due to higher the presence of 3
chlorine atolms
3. Anisotropic effects of chemical bonds.
Different properties in different directions is called anisotropy.
For example polarisation, magnetisation, hardness, conductivity
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 87
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Anisotropic effects are the result of a local induced magnetic field experienced by a nucleus
resulting from circulating electrons.
Anisotropy is found in Acetylene, ethylene and benzene
NMR of ETHYLENE Chemical shift = 5.25 ppm NMR of ETHANE Chemical shift =
0.86ppm
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 88
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
NMR of acetylene and Methane NMR of BENZENE Chemical shift =
2.05ppm
Chemical shift = 1.8 ppm( acetylene)
0.23ppm ( for methane)
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 89
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
4. Vanderwals deshielding:
The electron cloud of the bulky group will tend to repel the electron cloud and the
proton is deshielded.
B. Intermolecular factors
1. Hydrogen bonding A hydrogen atom involved in hydrogen bonding / shares its electrons with two
electronegative elements. As a result, it is itself deshielded and comes in to resonance at low
field.
For example, the OH group in chloro phenol shows peak at 6.3 ppm whereas that
of o- hydroxyl acetophenone shows at 12.3 ppm. This is due to Hydrogen bonding
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 90
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
2. Solvents The solvents used in NMR should be chemically inert, magnetically isotropic,
devoid of hydrogen atom and should dissolve the sample to a reasonable extent.[C6H6 , C6D6]
Problem -4. An NMR signal for a compound is found to be 180 Hz downward from TMS
peak using a spectrometer operating at 60 MHz. Calculate its chemical shift.
Chemical shift = shift ¿TMS ¿operating frequency × 10 6
= 180
60× 106 × 10 6
= 3ppm
Problem -5 A compound shows a proton NMR peak at 300 Hz downfield from TMS peak
in a spectrometer with chemical shift of 3pp. . Find the operating frequency
Solution:
Chemical shift = 300
x×106 ×106
3 = 300
x×106 ×106
X = 100 MHz
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 91
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
525 SPIN – SPIN COUPLING ( SPLITTING) INVOLVING H1
The interaction between the spins of neighbouring nuclei in a molecule is
known as spin- spin coupling. This leads to splitting of signals in to multiplet. This splitting
of signal is known as spin- spin splitting.
The multiplicity depends upon the number of nearby protons. If there are ‘n’ adjacent protons , then the number of signals will be ( n+ 1). This is known as (n+1) rule.
The (n+1) Rule, in 1H states that “ if a given nucleus is coupled
to ‘n’ number of nuclei that are equivalent , the multiplicity of the of the peak is (n+1)”
The relative intensities of the individual lines of a multiplet correspond to the numerical coefficient of the binomial expression (1 + x) n
If n = 2 , then (1 + x) 2 = 1 + 2x + x2
intensity ratio 1: 2:1
If n =3 , then (1 + x) 3 = 1 + 3x +3 x2 + x3
intensity ratio 1: 3:3:1
It is given by Pascal’s Triangle
SIGNAL PEAK AREA RATIO
singlet 1
doublet 1 1
triplet 1 2 1
quartet 1 3 3 1
quintet 1 4 6 4 1
Example :
Consider the NMR of 1,1,2- trichloro ethane.
It has two environmentally different hydrogen atoms
Therefore two signals are expected.
But the spectra shows a triplet and a doublet.
The Hb proton interacts with two Ha proton and hence its signal is split in to3 peaks in accordance with ( n+1) rule with relative intensity 1:2:1
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 92
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Similarly the Ha proton interacts with Hb proton and hence its signal is split in to2 peaks in accordance with ( n+1) rule with relative intensity 1:1
If there are three protons the intensity will be
Intensity is 1:3:3:1
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 93
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
NUMBER OF SIGNALS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 94
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
6.Which has multiplet in nmr?
I. benzene II. iso butylene III. 2-chloro propylene
7. The spectrum of isopropyl chloride shows
8. The spectrum of CH3-CH2-O- COOH shows
9.. A triplet and a quartet appears in
I. benzene II ethyl chloride III 2-chloro propylene
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 95
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Coupling constant:
The spacing of adjacent lines in the multiplets due to spin- spin coupling of
protons, is known as coupling constant J.
What is coupling constant? How it is calculated? Explain with suitable example.
Coupling constant:
1. The distance between the peaks in a given multiplet is a measure of the magnitude of
splitting effect.
2. It is referred to as coupling constant and is denoted by the symbol J.
3. Numerical value of J is expressed in Hz or cps. (cycles per second).
4. Unlike the chemical shifts, the value of J is independent of the applied field strength and
depends only upon the molecular structure.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 96
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
5. For a pair of mutually coupled protons, the coupling constant due to splitting by one
proton has the same value as the coupling constant due to the splitting by the second
proton In other words, mutually coupled protons show the same magnitude of the
splitting of each other signals.
The coupling constant 3Ja-b quantifies the magnetic interaction between the Ha and
Hb hydrogen sets, and this interaction is of the same magnitude in either direction.
Determination:
The size of coupling constant is determined by the number and kind of intervening
chemical bonds and the spatial relations between the protons
(a) For protons attached to the same carbons atom (i.e., germinal protons), the values of
J varies from 0-20 Hz depending upon the bond angle and overall structure of the
molecule.
(b) For protons attached to adjacent carbon atoms (i.e., vicinal protons), J varies from 2-
18 Hz depending upon the spatial positions and the structure of the molecules as a whole
Calculation of Coupling constant:
For the simple case of a doublet, the coupling constant is the difference between two peaks.
J is measured in Hz, not ppm.
First convert the peaks from ppm into hertz.
Suppose we have one peak at 4.260 ppm and another at 4.247 ppm.
To get Hz, just multiply these values by the field strength in mHz.
If we used a 500 mHz NMR machine, our peaks are at 2130 Hz and 2123.5 respectively.
The J value is just the difference.
In this case it is 2130 - 2123.5 = 6.5 Hz.
Problem
An NMR spectrum obtained from a spectrometer operated at 500 MHz shows peaks at
0.864 and 0.849 ppm find the coupling constant
Solution:
J =( 0.864 – 0.849 )× 500
= 0.15 × 500
= 7.5 Hz
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 97
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
TRIPLETTriplet has three peaks. We can take difference of any of the two peaks because the proton
couples equally with both the neighboring protons
Problem
An NMR spectrum obtained from a spectrometer operated at 500 MHz shows peaks at
3.585, 3.568 and 3.55ppm Find the coupling constant
Solution:
J =( 3.585 – 3.568 )× 500
= 0.017 × 500
= 8.5 Hz
Or
J =( 3.568 - 3.551 )× 500
= 0.017 × 500
= 8.5 Hz
QUARTET
The coupling constant for quartet is calculated just like triplet. Taking difference of any two
consecutive peaks will give the J value for quartet.
DOUBLE DOUBLETA double doublet has two coupling constants because it has two doublets. The coupling tree of the signal is quite helpful in identifying the peaks which will be used for calculation of the coupling constants in this case.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 98
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
We have four lines in this tree. The two coupling constants are denoted as J1 and J2.
Its quite simple to calculate J2 by taking difference of the line 1 and 2 or line 3 and 4.
J1 is the coupling constant for the two blue line in the tree which are in fact not visible in the
spectrum.
But if you look at this tree closely, you will find that the difference between line 1 and 3 or 2
and 4 is actually equal to the difference between the two blue lines, which in fact is J1.
Problem
An NMR spectrum obtained from a spectrometer operated at 500 MHz shows peaks at 2.
837, 2.808, 2.825 and 2,796 ppm Find the coupling constant
Solution:
J1 =( 2.837 – 2.808 )× 500
= 0.029 × 500
= 14.5 Hz
Or
J1 =( 2.825 - 2.796 )× 500
= 0.029 × 500
= 14.5 Hz
J2 =( 2.837 – 2.825 )× 500
= 0.012 × 500
= 6 Hz
Or
J1 =( 2.808 - 2.796 )× 500
= 0.012 × 500
= 6 Hz
Long range coupling.
In NMR spectroscopy, coupling between nuclei that are separated by more than three
bonds. Coupling of Ha with Hd (if present) is long range coupling, because these protons are
separated by four sigma bonds.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 99
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
LABELLING THE PROTONS ( SPIN SYSTEM NOTATION)-POPOLE METHOD
To designate the protons the following conventions are used.
1. The protons separated by small chemical shift is designated by the letters A,B,C
2. Those far away from chemical shift by X,Y,Z
3. Those intermediate as M,N,O
625NMR OF SIMPLE AX –SYSTEM ( n+1 rule obeys)
If the chemical shift between the protons is large compared to the coupling between
them (νAX >> JAX), we label them as HA and HX.
Some molecules that give AB or AX patterns are shown below (spectra are all at 300 MHz):
Disubstituted alkenes
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 100
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
The splitting follows (n+1 ) rule and it is called first order spectrum
peak numbers and intensities follow the polynomial coefficient scheme
∆𝛄 >> J
Example:
It contains two types of protons designated as Ha and Hb.
In its spectrum a simple pattern of two doublets appears.
Only two signals corresponding to Ha and Hb are expected.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 101
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
But due to spin – spin interaction of Ha on Hb, the Hb signal is split up into a doublet
with intensities 1:1 ratio.
Similarly due to spin – spin interaction of Hb on Ha, the Ha signal is split up into a
doublet with intensities 1:1 ratio.
Coupling constant J is the same in both cases No distortion occurs
-----------NOT FOR EXAMINATION-----------
Energy Levels of AX Spectra The four energy levels for an AX system are given by the equation below, by substituting
the four possible spin combinations of mA and mX (++, +-, -+, --):
E = -(mAνA + mXνX) + mAmXJAX
There are four states: αα, αβ, βα, ββ.
We will use the convention: αα is the lowest energy state (α is aligned with the field, m = +½)
and ββ is the highest energy state (β is aligned against the field, m = -½).
The first term in the equation is the chemical shift part, the second term the coupling part.
If the coupling is a small perturbation, then the energy is simply the sum of the two parts.
In energy level terms, this means that the energy separation of the αβ and βα states is large
compared to J.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 102
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 103
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
725 .NMR OF SIMPLE AMX – SYSTEM( n+1 rule fails)
If three protons are involved and they all have different chemical shifts , the
system is called AMX system.
Here the (n+1) rule fails. since the protons attached to a single carbon are chemically
non –equivalent .
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 104
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Each proton has different chemical shift values, coupling constant different from
those of each of
other protons
Because HA and HB are non equivalent and HC is coupled differently to HA than to HB
the (n+1)
rule fails
Proton A couples with X which splits the signal into a doublet. But A also couples
with M so that each line of A is further split in two giving four lines in all. Thus it shows a
double doublet ( JAM and JAX)
Similarly the M signal is split in to two by coupling with X and each line is further
split in to two by coupling with A . Two coupling constants are seen JMX and JAX and M
appears as a double doublet. Lastly the X signal is split in to a double doublet by two
successive couplings JAM and JAX. Totally 12 lines are observable.
J BC = 14 Hz , J BC = 6.3 Hz , J AB = 1.5 Hz
Other Example styrene oxide, vinyl acetate, furfural
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 105
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Styrene oxide
.Vinyl acetate:
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 106
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
825 13 C NMR [ CMR]
1.Why 13C shows spectra but 12C does not ?
All nuclei possessing spin value ½ , resonate with radio frequency and give rise to
NMR spectra. 12 C has spin value zero and hence it will not show NMR spectra whereas 13
C has spin value ½ therefore it shows NMR spectra.
2. Number of signals
For every non – equivalent carbon atom there will be a signal in the NMR. For example
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 107
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
1H NMR of CH3CH2OH 13 C- NMR of CH3CH2OH
Ethanol shows two signals, since it contains two non – equivalent carbon atoms.
3. No carbon- carbon coupling :
The abundance of 13C is very low, the chance for 13C nuclei adjacent to each other
in the same molecule is very small. Therefore carbon- carbon coupling is not possible
4. Multiplicity and intensity
Spin spin coupling between C13 – C13 nuclei will not be observed due to low natural
abundance of C13. But there is coupling between carbons and their attached hydrogen.
Due to coupling between carbon and hydrogen the signal is split up in to multiplet.
The number of signals obey (n+1) rule. Thus a methyl group appears as quartet, a
methylene as triplet, a methane as doublet, and a quarternary carbon as singlet
.The intensity obeys Pascal’s triangle.
.5. Chemical shift:
The chemical shift values are measured in ppm downfield from TMS. The range of
chemical shift is 200 ppm.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 108
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
6. Operating frequency:
CMR requires only one fourth of transmitter frequency. For PMR if 60 Hz is
required for CMR only (604 = 15) Hz is sufficient.
7. Double resonance ( decoupling)
To make the spectra simpler, the coupling due to protons should be removed. This
process is called decoupling. This is achieved by resonating the substance twice with
different frequencies. And this process is known as double resonance.
In completely proton decoupled spectra, all carbon resonance appear as singlets.
8.Regions of interest in 13C
Comparison of H 1 and C13
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 109
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
H 1 C13
1 100 % natural abundance 1.1 %
2 Chemical shift ranges from 0 – 10 ppm Up to 400 ppm
3 Coupling between H-H is more abundant Ignored because molecule having more than one C13 nuclei is less
4 High intense lines with sharp peak Low intensity with broad peak
5 Number of protons is measured by peak area
Due to the presence of Nuclear Overhaser Effect (NOE) and relaxation time , it is not so
6 It is used to assign the number of protons present on each site
To find the nature of binding of carbon with other functional groups
925 . F19 NMR
FLUORINE-19 NUCLEAR MAGNETIC RESONANCE SPECTROSCOPY
Fluorine -19 nuclear magnetic resonance spectroscopy (fluorine NMR or 19F NMR) is an
analytical technique used to detect and identify fluorine-containing compounds
Operational details
19F has
1. a nuclear spin (I) of ½
2. a high magnetogyric ratio ( 40.05 MHz/ tesla) . [ the ratio between magnetic momemt
and its angular momentum ]
3. 19F comprises 100% of naturally occurring fluorine.
Consequently, this isotope is highly responsive to NMR measurements.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 110
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Chemical Shift
19F NMR chemical shifts vary from 300 to 700 ppm
The very wide spectral range can cause problems in recording spectra, such as poor data
resolution
The reference compound for 19F NMR spectroscopy, is CFCl3 (0 ppm),
Typical chemical shift ranges for 19F
Spin-spin coupling
1. Fluorine atoms can also couple with each other.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 111
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
19F-19F coupling constants are generally larger than 1H-1H coupling constants.
Hydrogen couples with fluorine, which is seen in 19F spectrum
It is also possible to record decoupled 19F{1H}
Long range 19F-19F coupling, (2J, 3J or 4J of even 5J) are also observed
Other nuclei can also couple with fluorine
Applications
19F NMR spectroscopy is used to analyze
1. the structure of organofluorine compounds.
2.The pharmaceuticals that contain C-F bonds.
3. to analyse fluoride salts.
1025P31 NMR
PHOSPHORUS-31 NUCLEAR MAGNETIC RESONANCE
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 112
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Phosphorus-31 NMR spectroscopy is an analytical chemistry technique that
uses nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR) to study chemical compounds that contain
phosphorous
.
1. 31P has an isotopic abundance of 100%
2. a relatively high gyromagnetic ratio. [ 17.24 MHz/ tesla) [the ratio between
magnetic momemt and its angular momentum ]
3. The 31P nucleus also has a spin of ½,
Operational aspects
With a gyromagnetic ratio 40.5% of that for 1H, 31P NMR signals are observed near
202 MHz on an 11.7 Tesla magnet
Chemical shifts
Chemical shifts are referenced to 85% phosphoric acid, which is assigned the chemical
shift of 0,
The chemical shifts ranges from 250 to – 250 ppm, which is much wider than for 1H NMR.
Typical chemical shift ranges
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 113
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Coupling constants
1.One-bond coupling is illustrated by PH3 where J(P,H) is 189 Hz.
2.Two-bond couplings, are an order of magnitude smaller.
3. Spectra are recorded with protons decoupled.
Applications in chemistry
1. 31P-NMR spectroscopy is useful to assign structures of phosphorus-containing
compounds
2. used for studies of phospholipid bilayers and biological membranes
1125Fourier Transform NMR (FTNMR)
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 114
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
In conventional NMR ( continuous wave CW NMR) the spectrum is presented in
time domain and the intensity of radiation is a function of time
I = f(t).
To measure NMR in time domain , one has to scan a very broad band of
frequency which is time consuming / but in frequency domain, one can apply all the
frequencies in a very short time.
If the NMR spectrum is presented in frequency domain, it is called FT-NMR.
Here the intensity of radiation is a function of frequency
I= f(ϑ )
f(γ) can be converted into f( t) by the following formula
f(t) = ∫−∞
+∞
e2 πiγt f(γ) dγ This is known as Fourier transform. Conversely
f(γ) = ∫−∞
+∞
e−2 πiγt f(t) dt This is known as inverse Fourier transform.
In this technique, the sample is subjected to a high power pulse of radio frequency
radiation. It causes all the spin active nuclei to resonate all at once. As soon as the radio
frequency pulse terminates, the magnetisation vector starts decaying. This is known as Free
Induction Decay (FID) This is modulated .The signal detected as the nuclei return to the
equilibrium and recorded as an array of numbers in a ccomputer.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 115
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 116
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
The band of frequency required is obtained by applying a square wave pulse of RF
power in x-y plane. The square wave is synthesised by superposition of several sinusoidal
waves. The pulse is supplied by the radiofrequency field which has Larmour frequency of
100 MHz. If the length of pulse is tp the sample receives the range of frequiencies of abour
1/tp + γ. The Fourier components add to or subtract from this carrier frequency.
As soon as the radio frequency pulse terminates, the magnetisation vector in the x-y
plane starts decaying. This is called free induction decay[FID]. In order to improve signal
to noise [S/N ]ratio several consecutive pulses are applied thereby enhancing the intensity of
the signal. The FIDs are collected in the computer and averaged before being Fourier
transformed to give time spectrum.
[NOT FOR EXAMINATION]
F[f(x)] = 1√2 π ∫
−∞
+∞
f ( x)eisx dx
Problem :Find the Fourier Transform of f(x) = cos x if 0<x<1
Solution:
F[f(x)] = 1√2 π ∫
−∞
+∞
f ( x)eisx dx
= 1√2 π∫0
1
cos x eisx dx
= 1√2 π∫0
1
cos x ¿
= 1√2 π∫0
1
cos x cos sx+i cos x sin sx dx
= 1√2 π
× 12∫0
1
cos (s+1 ) x+¿cos ( s−1 ) x+isin ( s+1 ) x+sin ¿¿¿
=1
2√2π [
sin (s+1 ) x( s+1 )
+ sin (s−1 ) x
( s−1 )- i
cos (s+1 ) x(s+1)
- i cos (s−1 ) x
(s−1) ]
=1
2√2π [
sin (s+1 )( s+1 )
+ sin (s−1 )
( s−1 )- i
cos (s+1 )(s+1)
- i cos (s−1 )(s−1)
] – [ 0+0 - i1
(s+1) - i 1
(s−1) ]
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 117
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
?
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 118
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
1225 ELECTRON SPIN RESONANCE (ESR) SPECTROSCOPY
(OR) ELECTRON PARAMAGNEIC RESONANCE (EPR) SPECTROSCOPY
It is a branch of absorption spectroscopy in which radiation of micro wave frequency ( 10 9 – 10 13 Hz) is absorbed by paramagnetic substance.
It’s use is therefore confined to 1. atoms with unpaired electrons, 2. free radicals, 3. ions, 4. triple state molecules, 5. molecular fragments, 6. complexes with unpaired d and f electrons.
s.no ESR NMR
1. It arises due to spinning of electron about nucleus. It arises due to interaction between
proton and magnetic field
2. Absorption region is microwave Absorption region is Radio wave
3. Spectra is shown only by compounds having unpaired electron ( paramagnetic substances, free radicals, ions, triple state molecules, molecular fragments, complexes with unpaired d and f electrons.
Spectra is shown by all compounds
4. No Chemical shift( if there is neighbouring free electron then the molecule may not be paramagnetic)
Due to the presence of neighbouring proton there occurs chemical shift
5. Required frequency is 28000 Hz Required frequency is 40 Hz
7. Standard used is DPPH TMS
DPPH - 2,2-diphenyl-1-picrylhydrazyl radical
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 119
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
DPPH contains 1.53 × 1021 unpaired electrons per gram
It has splitting factor g = 2.0036
In benzene solution it gives 5 lines with intensity ratio 1:2:3:2:1
1325 PRINCIPLE OF ESR
ESR is based on the fact that paramagnetic substances exhibit characteristic magnetic properties. Such magnetic characteristics is due to spinning action of unpaired electrons about the nucleus.
The spinning motion of electron so generates a magnetic field. The magnetic moment due to spinning is given by
μs = - g eh
4 πmc √s (s+1) -----------------1
‘g’ is called Lande’s splitting factor. eh
4 πmc is called Bohr magneton (β)
√s (s+1) is called spin angular momentum Ms
Therefore the above equation becomes μs = - gβMs -----------------2 when an electron is placed in an external magnetic field of strength B the magnetic energy of interaction will be E = - μs B . Substituting the value of μs from 2 we get E = + g β Ms B
For spin Ms = + ½ , E ½ = + ½ g β B
For spin Ms = - ½ , E- ½ = - ½ g β B
∆E = E ½ - E- ½
= + ½ g β B – (- ½ g β B)
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 120
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
= g β B
. If the electron in magnetic field (B) is irradiated with microwave radiation of
frequency ϑ, the energy hϑ will be absorbed by the electron. When this energy , coincides
the energy level separation between the two states, the resonance absorption takes place
causing the excitation of electrons.
∴ hϑ = g β B This is the condition for resonance.
The selection rule in ESR is ∆ MI = 0 ,∆ Ms = ± 1
ms = - ½ ms = ±1/2
ms = + ½
No field external magnetic field
Since the ESR spectrum is not sharp (broad), it is difficult to locate the peak in the absorption mode. Therefore spectrum in derivative mode is recorded.
ESR spectrum in absorption mode ESR spectrum in derivative mode
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 121
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
1425HYPERFINE SPLITTING( ELECTRON – NUCLEUS COUPLING)
The magnetic interaction between the electron spin and the nuclear spin ( I ≠ 0) in the
same molecule is called hyperfine coupling and the splitting of resonance lines into
component lines is called hyperfine splitting.
Hyperfine splitting of Hydrogen atom:
1. Hydrogen atom has one proton and one electron with s = ½ .
2. There are two possible orientations for the magnetic moments of the nucleus Ms = ±
½
3. In the absence of magnetic field, the single electron of spin Ms = ½ gives rise to
doubly degenerate energy state.
4. When a magnetic field is applied, the degeneracy is removed and the two energy
levels , one corresponding to Ms = - ½ and the other corresponding to Ms = + ½
will be obtained.
5. When the proton interacts, each energy state is further split up in to two energy levels
corresponding to MI = + ½ and MI = - ½ where MI is the nuclear spin angular
momentum quantum number.
6. Thus corresponding to two energy levels, four different energy levels are obtained.
7. The selection rule in ESR is ∆ MI = 0 ,∆ Ms = ± 1
For Ms =+ ½ , MI = - ½ + ½ = 0
For Ms = - ½ , MI = - ½ + ½ = 0
Applying selection rule it is found that ESR spectrum of Hydrogen consists
of two peaks. The expression for energy is given by
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 122
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
E = ms gβH + A msmI Where A – hyperfine coupling constant.(HCC)
E ½ . ½ = ½ gβH + ¼ A,
E ½ .- ½ = ½ gβH - ¼ A
E- ½ .- ½ = - ½ gβH + ¼ A,
E- ½ . ½ = - ½ gβH - ¼ A
ESR – spectra of H - ATOM
2 lines are observed
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 123
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
In deutrium atom 3 lines are observed
For Methyl radical
4 lines are observed
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 124
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Hyperfine splitting constant (hcc)
Rules for predicting number of hyperfine lines:
1. When an electron interacts with ‘n’- equivalent nuclei of spin I Number of ESR lines = ( 2nI + 1 )
2. The relative intensity of lines is proportional to the coefficient of binomial expansion of ( 1+x)n [ pascal’s triangle] . but it is restricted to equivalent protons.
For example The number of hyperfine lines in H atom = 2(1) ( ½ ) + 1 = 2 with intensity ratio 1: 1The number of hyperfine lines in D atom = 2(2) ( ½ ) + 1 = 3 with intensity ratio 1:2:1The number of hyperfine lines in CH2 radical = 2(2) ( ½ ) + 1 = 3 with intensity ratio 1:2:1The number of hyperfine lines in CH3 radical = 2(3) ( ½ ) + 1 = 4 with intensity ratio 1:3:3:1
The number of hyperfine lines in C6H5 radical = 2(6) ( ½ ) + 1 = 7
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 125
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
The number of hyperfine lines in benzo quinone radical = 2(4) ( ½ ) + 1 = 5
When an electron interacts with ‘n’- equivalent nuclei of spin Ii and a set of equivalent nuclei ‘m’ of spin Ij , then Number of lines = ( 2nIi + 1 ) ( 2mIj +1 )This is applicable for nuclei with I -= ½ For example
Naphthalene ion Naphthalene ion has two sets of 4 equivalent protons each.
Number of lines = ( 2) (4) ( ½ )+ 1 )× ( 2) (4) ( ½ )+ 1 )
= 25 ?
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 126
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Anthracene ion
It has 3 sets of equivalent protons . Set α and β contains 4 equivalent protons each and set γ contains 2 equivalent protons
Number of lines = [ ( 2) (4) ( ½ )+ 1 )] ×[( 2) (4) ( ½ )+ 1)] × [ ( 2) (2) ( ½ )+ 1]
= 75 lines ?
1525 MC-CONNELL RELATION
It gives the relation between hyperfine coupling constant (hcc)and the spin density.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 127
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
For a free atom hcc is proportional to the spin density
A∝ ρ
A = Q ρ where A – the dependence of hcc, ρ - spin density, Q- proton
hyperfine constant. This is known as McConnell relation
Use:
It is used to calculate the electron density at each carbon.
1. For hydrogen
Since the electron spends its time in 1s orbital only ρ = 1
Hence For hydrogen atom A = Q , standard value of Q= 500 G ( gauss)
2. For methyl radical (CH3)
The separation between the lines (A) is found to be 23 gauss
Applying McConnell relation
ρ = AQ
= 23
500
= 0.046
= 4.6 %
Electron density on carbon = 100- 3(4.6 )
= 100 - 13. 8
= 86.4 %
This implies that the unpaired electron spends 4.6 % of its time in is orbital of each
hydrogen atom.
And 86.4 % in the vicinity of carbon atom.
3. The esr spectrum of benzene radical C6H6.
In benzene the spin polarisation leads to small spin density in both C and H atomic
orbital.
standard value of Q= 22.5 G ( gauss)
Shows a septet with coupling constant 3.75 G
ρ = AQ
= 3.7522.5
= 0.0076
There are 6 hydrogens with this electron density making a total of
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 128
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
6×0.0076 = 0.046
= 5%
The remaining 95 % of electron’s time is spent equally on the 6 carbon atoms
On each carbon = 956
= 15.8
This shows that magnitude of spin density on the ring proton is 5 % as large as the pz
spin density on the adjacent ring carbon.
1625THEORY ( PRINCIPLE) OF MASS SPECTRA
In mass spectra , the sample is vaporised and sent to ionisation chamber where the
molecule forms molecular ion( M+). This is further subjected to fragmentation by applying
high voltage The fragments having charge are accelerated by electric plates . the
accelerated charged particle passes through radial magnetic field.
Depending on the mass of the fragment it follows the radial path. After this the
rays are sent through slits so the only particular ion comes out of the slit. It is detected and
recorded.
Expression for radius:
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 129
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
The potential energy due to electric field E = Ee .
This energy is converted into kinetic energy ½ m v2
Therefore ½ m v2 = Ee
v2 = 2Eem ------------------1
The accelerated charged fragments are subjected to radial magnetic field(B)
The force experienced by the fragment = Bev
This is equal to centrifugal force m v2
r where r is the radius of the circular motion
Therefore m v2
r = Bev
v = Berm
Squaring on both sides
v2 = B2e2r2
m2 ----------------------2
from 1 and 2 B2e2r2
m2 = 2 Ee
m
r2 = 2 EmB2 e
= 2EB2 ¿ )
r2 ∝ me
This indicates that the radius of the curvature of the different ions depends on me
which shows that the fragment having low me value has lesser radius than the one having
higher me .
me = B
2r2
2 E
Thus the ions are separated on the basis of m/e values. The mass spectrum can be obtained
either by changing B at constant E or changing E at constant B.
INSTRUMENTATION
Mass spectrometer consists of the following components.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 130
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
1. Vapourisation chamber2. Ionisation chamber3. Accelerator4. Mass analyser
1.Vapourisation chamber
The sample is introduced into an inlet chamber and volatilized.
2.Ionisation chamber
There are two methods of ionization
A. Electron ionization.( EI-MS)
In this technique , electrons are accelerated from a hot tungsten filament to an anode.
These electrons strike the stream of molecules creating cations
The product is a cation radical .
Advantage: it gives rise to fragment ions
Disadvantage: absence of molecular ion
B. Chemical ionization( CI-MS)
In this method, sample molecules are combined with a stream of ionised reagent gas
like methane, ammonia and isobutene. When the sample molecules collide with the
ionised reagent the molecule gets ionised.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 131
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Thus in positive ion CI spectra molecular weight information is obtained from
protonation of sample molecule. The observed m/e value is one unit more than the true
molecular weight.
3.Accelerator
The resulting positively charged particles are accelerated by the accelerating plates
into a bent chamber surrounded by a magnetic field
4.Mass analyser:
Dempster’s mass spectrometer is used . the positive ions accelerated by electric field
travel in a circular path under a magnetic field B on a collector
Each of the ions of different masses follows a circular path whose radius is given by
r2 = 2 EmB2 e
. Ions with larger me follow a path with smaller radius.
4. RecorderA graphic presentation is used which represents the intensities of the signals at various m/e values.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 132
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
1725 Mc - LEFERTY REARRANGEMENT
Compounds having 𝛄- H atom and unsaturation centre undergo H- transfer
reaction in such a way that the α−β bond is broken and the β−γ bond is formed. The γ
– hydrogen atom is transferred to unsaturation centre. This type of rearrangement is called
McLeferty rearrangement
Example 1: butanal
m/e = 72 [4(12) + 1(16) +8(1) ] m/e = 28 + m/e = 44
peak at = 72 – 28 = 44
Example 2: pentanoic acid
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 133
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
m/e = 102 [5(12) + 2(16) +10(1) ] m/e = 42 + m/e =
60
peak at = 102 – 42 = 60
If even mass number molecular ion yield fragments of even mass number and odd
mass number molecular ion yield fragments of odd mass number, it indicates
rearrangement
Amide
Primary amides show a base peak due to the McLafferty rearrangement.
Example 1 : 3-Methylbutyramide (C5H11NO) with MW = 101.15
Problem : Pentanoic acid undergoes McLafferty rearrangement. One of the peak could
have been appeared at m/e value[ 4 marks]
Solution :
Ans = 60
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 134
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Problem : 3-Methylbutyramide undergoes McLafferty rearrangement. One of the peak
could have been appeared at m/e value[ 4 marks]
Peak at = 101- 42= 59
Problem : The mass spectra of a compound [ MWt = 72] shows peak at 44
[ CH2CHOH] with the elimination of ethylene molecule .The compound could be
Solution :
Mol.wt = 48 + 8+16 = 72
The compound is Butanal
1. It involves the cleavage of a β - bond followed by a γ - hydrogen transfer
2. The rearrangement leads to elimination of neutral molecules
3. It takes place through a six membered transition state.
4. The ion formed is called MRion
Example 4. Problem :The MR ion formed in 2- hexanone is
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 135
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Example 5: Problem :The MR ion formed in 1- pentene
Example 6: Problem :The MR ion formed in n-propyl benzene
Example 7. Problem :The MR ion formed in methyl-(1-phenyl propyl) ketone
Example 8 Double McLafferty rearrangement
Double MR is reported in certain ketone. For example in 4- heptanone
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 136
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
FRAGMENTATION PATTERN
In mass spectrometry, fragmentation is the dissociation of energetically unstable
molecular ions formed from passing the molecules in the ionization chamber of a mass
spectrometer.
The fragments of a molecule cause a pattern in the mass spectrum used to determine
structural information of the molecule.
Parent peak ( molecular ion peak)1. It is the peak with its mass equal to that of molecular formula.2. This is formed by removal of electron ( not atom) from parent molecule.
M + e → M+ + 2eCH3OH → CH3OH + + 2e
3. It is the peak of highest mass number except isotopic peak.
2. Base peak : 1. It is the tallest peak in the spectra.2. Some times parent peak may be the base peak .
3. Meta stable peak:1. These are low intensity , broad peaks.2. These occur at non – integer m/e value.3. Some ions decompose before completing the mass analysis which gives this peak. 3. Mass of meta stable ion = ¿¿
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 137
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
4.Isotopic peak ( M+1) peak:
1825 FRAGMENTATION PATTERN OF ALKANES
1. The molecular ion in n-alkanes is always present.
2. The molecular ion peak has low intensity for long chain compounds
3. These fragment ions are surrounded by clusters of smaller peaks due to the presences of 13C , (M+1) + and loss of hydrogen (M-1)+ ,and (M-2)+ etc.
4. The fragmentation pattern contains clusters of peaks 14 mass units apart (which represent loss of (CH2) 5. EXAMPLE : mass spectrum of Pentane (C5H12) with MW = 72, shows peaks at m/z values corresponding to 57,43 and 29
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 138
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
FRAGMENTATION PATTERN OF BRANCHED CHAIN ALKANES
1. Bond cleavage occurs at the site of branching 2. Greater number of fragments result from a branched chain compound compared to
straight chain compound. This is due to more sites available for cleavage.3. Largest substituent at a branch is eliminated readily as a radical4. Parent ion peak is not observed.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 139
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 140
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
FRAGMENTATION PATTERN FOR SIMPLE AROMATIC HYDROCARBONS
1. The aromatic molecules like benzene and toluene are accompanied by M+1 and M+2
peaks
due to 13 C and or D
Benzene displays characteristics peaks at m/e = 78, 77, 53,51 and 39
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 141
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Toluene displays peaks corresponds to the rupture of benzylic bond ( β- cleavage in the side chain)It has strong molecular ion peak The base peak at m/e = 91 corresponds to the ion C7H7 + which is stabilized by the formation of tropylium ion It also shows a peak due to loss of CH3 group.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 142
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
mass spectrum of Hexane (C6H14) with MW = 86, shows peaks at m/z values corresponding to 57,43 and 29
1925FRAGMENTATION PATTERN FOR SIMPLE ALCOHOLS
1. Primary and secondary alcohols give weak molecular ion peaks.
2. Characteristic ions result via fission of the C-C bond next to the oxygen atom
3. H radical also be ejected
4. For example Methanol shows three peaks at me = 29,31 and 32
5.The peak at me = 32 is due to molecular ion peak
6. The peak at me = 31 arise from loss of H atom and forming hydromethyl ( CH2=OH)
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 143
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
5. The peak atme = 29 arises from loss of two more H- atoms.
7. The minor peak atme = 15 arises from the loss of OH from the molecular ion peak.
AlcoholAn alcohol's molecular ion is small or non-existent. Cleavage of the C-C bond next to the oxygen usually occurs. A loss of H2O may occur as in the spectra below.
3-Pentanol (C5H12O) with MW = 88.15
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 144
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
2025FRAGMENTATION PATTERN OF ALDEHYDES AND
KETONES
1. ALIPHATIC ALDEHYDES:
1. Aldehydes give molecular ions of low intensity
2. The C-C and C-H bond adjacent to oxygen atom gets broken and give corresponding
peaks
3. Elimination of H atom results ( acylium ion) M-1 peak
4. M- R peak is also found out.
5. When 𝛄 – hydrogen is present McLafferty rearrangement takes place . This leads to the
fission of 𝛂- 𝛃 C- C
bond to give peaks corresponding to the products formed.
For example fragmentation of 1- butanal,
m/e = 72 [4(12) + 1(16) +8(1) ] m/e = 28 + m/e = 44
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 145
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
For example fragmentation of 2-methyl butanal
For example fragmentation of 3-methyl butanal
AldehydeCleavage of bonds next to the carboxyl group results in the loss of hydrogen (molecular ion less 1) or the loss of CHO (molecular ion less 29).
3-Phenyl-2-propenal (C9H8O) with MW = 132.16
2. AROMATIC ALDEHYDES
1. These compounds give strong peaks for the molecular ion.
2. They undergo cleavage at the bond 𝛃 – to the ring . This accounts the base peak.
3. Aromatic aldehydes are characterized by M-1 peak due to loss of hydrogen.
4. This eliminates CO to give phenyl ion
5. This further eliminates C2H2 to give C4H3.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 146
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
For example fragmentation of Benzaldehyde
3.ALIPHATIC KETONES:
1. The major fragmentation involves the fission of C-C bonds adjacent to the oxygen atom.
2. The loss of larger alkyl group results the base peak.
3. For methyl ketone acylium ion ( CH3CO) ion is the base peak.
4. Alkyl ions are formed from acylium ion by the loss of CO.
5. When 𝛄 – hydrogen is present McLafferty rearrangement takes place . This leads to the
fission of 𝛂- 𝛃 C- C bond to give peaks corresponding to the products formed
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 147
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
For example fragmentation of Acetone
For example fragmentation of 2- pentanone
4. AROMATIC KETONES
1. These compounds give strong peaks for the molecular ion.
2. They undergo cleavage at the bond 𝛃 – to the ring . this accounts the base peak.
3. Aromatic aldehydes are characterized by M-1 peak due to loss of hydrogen.
4. This eliminates CO to give phenyl ion
5. This further eliminates C2H2 to give C5H5.
For example fragmentation of Benzophenone
2125MOSSBAUER SPECTRA
It is the study of γ rays emission and subsequent re- absorption in solids
Principle
If a nucleus at rest emits a gamma ray, the energy of the gamma ray is
slightly less than the natural energy of the transition, but in order for a nucleus at rest
to absorb a gamma ray, the gamma ray's energy must be slightly greater than the natural
energy, because in both cases energy is lost to recoil.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 148
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
This means that nuclear resonance (emission and absorption of the same gamma ray
by identical nuclei) is unobservable with free nuclei, because the shift in energy is too great
and the emission and absorption spectra have no significant overlap.
Nuclei in a solid crystal, however, are not free to recoil because they are bound in
place in the crystal lattice.
When a nucleus in a solid emits or absorbs a gamma ray, some energy can still be lost
as recoil energy, but in this case it always occurs in discrete packets called phonons
. Any whole number of phonons can be emitted, including zero, which is known as a
"recoil-free" event. Mössbauer found that a significant fraction of emission and absorption
events will be recoil-free, which is quantified using the Lamb–Mössbauer factor.
it means that gamma rays emitted by one nucleus can be resonantly absorbed by a sample
containing nuclei of the same isotope, and this absorption can be measured.
Certain atomic nuclei bound in a crystal emit gamma rays which can be used
as a probe of energy levels in other nuclei.
Sodium nitroprusside is a common reference material
In the resulting spectra, gamma ray intensity is plotted as a function of the source velocity
. At velocities corresponding to the resonant energy levels of the sample, a fraction of the
gamma rays are absorbed, resulting in a drop in the measured intensity and a corresponding
dip in the spectrum.
The number, positions, and intensities of the dips (also called peaks; dips in transmitted
intensity are peaks in absorbance) provide information about the chemical environment of the
absorbing nuclei and can be used to characterize the sample.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 149
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
2225DOPPLER EFFECTS
The Doppler effect is the change in frequency or wavelength of a wave in relation
to observer who is moving relative to the wave source.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 150
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
2325 ISOMER SHIFT
Isomer shift (δ) is the shift in the resonance energy of a nucleus due to the transition of
electrons within its s orbital.
The whole spectrum is shifted in either a positive or negative direction depending upon the s
electron charge density.
This change arises due to alterations in the electrostatic response between the non-zero
probability s orbital electrons and the non-zero volume nucleus of the orbit.
Only electrons in s orbitals demonstrate non-zero probability because their 3D spherical
shape incorporates the volume taken up by the nucleus.
However, the p, d, and other electrons may influence the s electron density through
a screening effect.
Isomer shift can be expressed using the formula
CS = K [Re2 - Rg
2 ] [Ψs2(0)]a - [Ψs
2(0)]b
Where CS – Chemical Shift, K is a nuclear constant,
the difference between Re2 and Rg
2 is the effective nuclear charge radius difference between
excited state and the ground state,
the difference between [Ψs2(0)]aand [Ψs
2(0)]b is the electron density difference on the nucleus
(a = source, b = sample).
.
2425 QUADRUPOLE INTERACTIONS ( Electron-Neutron Hyperfine Interactions.)
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 151
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
For nucleus having I > ½ ( I = 1, 3/2, 2, 5/2 ….) , the distribution of electric charge ,
is unsymmetrical which leads to quadrapole moment ( four charges).These nuclei are
referred to quadrapole nuclei
Symmetric distribution of charge unsymmetric distribution of charge
( dipole I = 0, ½ ) (quadrapole, I > ½ )
Quadrupole splitting reflects the interaction between the nuclear energy levels and
surrounding electric field gradient (EFG).
Nuclei in states with non-spherical charge distributions, i.e. all those with angular quantum
number (I) greater than 1/2, produce an asymmetrical electric field which splits the nuclear
energy levels.
In the case of an isotope with a I=3/2 excited state, such as 57Fe or 119Sn, the 3/2 to 1/2
transition is split into two substates mI=±1/2 and mI=±3/2.
These appear as two specific peaks in a spectrum, sometimes referred to as a 'doublet'.
Quadrupole splitting is measured as the separation between these two peaks and reflects the
character of the electric field at the nucleus.
The Quadrupole splitting can be used for determining oxidation state, spin state, site
symmetry and the arrangement of ligands.
The ground to excited state transitions appear as two specific peaks in a spectrum,
[ "doublet".]
Quadrupole splitting is measured as the separation between these two peaks and reflects
the character of the electric field at the nucleus.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 152
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
2425 MAGNETIC INTERACTIONS
Magnetic splitting (hyperfine splitting) is a result of the interaction between the nucleus and
any surrounding magnetic field.
A nucleus with spin, I, splits into 2I + 1 sub-energy levels in the presence of magnetic field.
For example, a nucleus with spin state I= 3/2 will split into 4 non-degenerate sub-states with
mI values of +3/2, +1/2, -1/2 and −3/2.
The selection rule of magnetic dipoles means that transitions between the excited state and
ground state can only occur where mI changes by 0 or 1.
Magnetic splitting of the nuclear energy levels and the corresponding Mössbauer spectrum
This gives six possible transitions for a 3/2 to 1/2 transition.
This gives 6 possible transitions for a 3/2 to 1/2 transition. Therefore only 6 peaks
can be monitored in a spectrum produced by a hyperfine splitting.
The extent of splitting is proportional to the magnetic field strength at the nucleus.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 153
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Therefore, the magnetic field can be readily determined from the spacing between the
outer peaks.
Combination of all
The three Mössbauer parameters: isomer shift, quadrupole splitting, and hyperfine
splitting can often be used to identify a particular compound by comparison to spectra for
standards.
In some cases, a compound may have more than one possible position for the Mössbauer
active atom. For example, the crystal structure of magnetite (Fe3O4) supports two
different sites for the iron atoms. Its spectrum has 12 peaks, a sextet for each potential
atomic site, corresponding to two sets of Mössbauer parameters.
Many times all effects are observed: isomer shift, quadrupole splitting, and magnetic
Zeeman effect.
In such cases the isomer shift is given by the average of all lines.
The quadrupole splitting when all the four excited substates are equally shifted (two
substates are lifted and other two are lowered) is given by the shift of the outer two lines
relative to the inner four lines (all inner four lines shift in opposite to the outer most two
lines).
In addition, the relative intensities of the various peaks reflect the relative concentrations
of compounds in a sample and can be used for semi-quantitative analysis.
Also, since ferromagnetic phenomena are size-dependent, in some cases spectra can
provide insight into the crystallite size and grain structure of a material.
.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 154
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
UNIT IVELECTROCHEMISTRY OF SOLUTION
1. Mean ionic activity and activity coefficient:
2. Concept of ionic strength,
3. Debye-Huckel theory of strong electrolytes
4. Activity coefficient of strong electrolytes-
5. Determination
6. Debye Huckel limiting law at appreciable concentration of electrolytes –
7. Debye Huckel Bronsted equation-qualitative and quantitative verification.
8. Redox reaction:
9. Cell potential,
10. Galvanic cell,
11. Electrolytic cell,
12. Nernst equation for cell potential of electrolyte.
13. Electrode equilibrium
14. Thermodynamic electrodes and electrode potential,
15. Electrochemical cells and electromotive force.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 155
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
115MEAN IONIC ACTIVITY AND ACTIVITY COEFFICIENT:
215 CONCEPT OF IONIC STRENGTH,
Ionic strength:
It is the measure of electrical intensity, due to the presence of ions in the solution. It is given by half of the sum of all the terms obtained by multiplying the molality of each ion by the square of its valency.
μ = ½ ( m1z1 2 + m2 z22 + m3z3 2+.................)
1.Calculate the ionic strength of 0.15 molal KCl solution
m+ = 0.15 m- = 0.15 , z+ = 1, z- = 1
μ = ½ ( m1z1 2 + m2 z22 + m3z3 2+.................)
μ = ½ ( (0.15)(1) 2 + (0.15)(1) 2 )
= 0.152. .Calculate the ionic strength of 0.25 molal K 2SO4 solution
m+ = (2 ×0.25 ) m- = 0.15 , z+ = 1, z- = 2
μ = ½ ( m1z1 2 + m2 z22 + m3z3 2+.................)
μ = ½ ( (2 ×0.25 )(1) 2 + (0.25)(2) 2 ) = 0.752. .Calculate the ionic strength of solution which is 0.1 M KCl and 0.2M molal K 2SO4
m1 = 0. 1 + (2 ×0.2 ) = 0.5
m-2 = 0.1 z1 = 1, z2 = 1 , z3 = 2
μ = ½ ( m1z1 2 + m2 z22 + m3z3 2+.................)
μ = ½ ( ( 0.5¿ (1) 2 + ( 0.1¿ (1) 2 + (0.2)(2) 2 ) = 0.7
315 DEBYE-HUCKEL THEORY OF STRONG ELECTROLYTES
DEBYE- HUCKEL THEORY OF STRONG ELECTROLYTE:
According to this theory,
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 156
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
1.The strong electrolytes are completely ionised in solution at all concentrations.
2.If the solution is very dilute, the distance between the ions is large and hence the
electrostatic force is very less
3.If the solution is of high concentration, the inter ionic force will be more and the
electrolyte will remain in pairs such as A+B - ,known as ionic doublet and hence
conductance decreases
4. Each ion is surrounded by ions of opposite charge giving rise to an ionic atmosphere
Thus a cation is surrounded by a group of anions as represented below.
6. The movement of ion is slow down by three factors namely viscous force, Asymmetric
effect and Electrophoretic effect.
1. Viscous effect( frictional force):
It is due to viscous drag of the solvent on the movement of ions.
The frictional force F1 = Ki u where K - coefficient of friction of solvent.
2.Asymmetric effect ( relaxation effect ):
On passing current, the movement of ion becomes slow. This is known as
asymmetric effect or relaxation effect.
Relaxation force F 2 = ∈2 z kwV
6 D KT
∈ - constant, z - charge per unit volume, k - Reciprocal of thickness,
w - 2- √2, V - Applied potential, D- Dielectric constant, K - Frictional
coefficient, T - Temperature
3.Electrophoretic effect:
The ionic atmosphere associated with water of hydration t slows down the movement
of ions. This effect is known as electrophoretic effect.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 157
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Electrophoretic force F3 = ∈ z k6 πη Ki V
where Ki - coefficient of frictional resistance
The driving force due to the applied electric field is balanced by the three forces
∴ ∈Z V = F1 + F2 +F3
using this we can derive
ƛ = ƛ 0 - { 82.4
η (DT )1/2 + 8.2× 105( DT )3 /2
ƛ0} √ C
. = ƛ 0 - ( A+ B ƛ0 ) √ C where A = 82.4
η (DT )1/2 ,and B = 8.2× 105( DT )3 /2
This is known as Debye- Huckel – Onsager( DHO) conductance equation
ƛ = - ( A+ B ƛ0 )√ C + ƛ 0
The plot of ƛ versus √ C is a straight line.
from the graph equivalent conductance at infinite dilution is = 0.25 units
Testing:
1. Plot of ƛ versus √c should be a straight line
2. The slope should be equal to A+ B ƛ0
Problem: When the observed equivalent conductance were plotted against the square root
of the corresponding concentration the the straight line obtained had a slope of 0.05 and if ƛ0
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 158
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
is equal to 0.01 and B is equal to 0.2, the value of A is
Solution:
A+ B ƛ0 = 0.05
A+ (0.2)( 0.01) = 0.05
A+ 0.002 = 0. 0.05
A = 0.05 – 0.002
= .048
Problem: What will be the slope expected if the Onsager constants were found to beA=
60.0 and B = 1.5 The equivalent conductance at infinite dilution was 1.5 × 10−2
Solution:
A+ B ƛ0 = 60 .0 + 1.5 × 1.5 × 10−2
= 60 + 2.25 × 10−2
= 60 +0.225
= 60.225
For bi-bi valant solute(CuSO4) the plot was not straight line but is concave to the axis of
the latter parameter.
In non- aqueos solutions, if the dielectric constant is very low, the deviation is more. For
example the onsager slope of KI in water ( D= 78.5) was found to be 73 ( calculated = 80)
but that in acetone ( D= 20 ) the slope was found to be 1000 ( calculated 638)
This is due to the fact that in non – aqueous solvents of low dielectric constant , the solute
behaves incompletely dissociated
415ACTIVITY COEFFICIENT OF STRONG ELECTROLYTES-
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 159
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
515DETERMINATION
615DEBYE HUCKEL LIMITING LAW AT APPRECIABLE
CONCENTRATION OF ELECTROLYTES –
Debye - Huckle limitng law ( DHLL) :
The relation between activity coefficient and ionic strength is called DHLL. This is given by log f = - Az2√ μ
where f = activity coefficient, A – constant, z- valency of the ionThis shows that the activity coefficient of an ion
1. Decreases with increasing ionic strength of the solution.2. Decreases when the valency is higher3. Decreases when the dielectric constant is lower4. Decreases when the temperature is lower
similarly mean activity coefficient (f ± ) is given by log f ± = - A z+ z - √ μ
This is called limiting law because the assumptions made during derivation is applicable at infinite dilution only.
Derivation:
The chemical potential and activity coefficient are related as
RT lnf = 𝛍
= δGδN where G – free energy and N – total number of
ions
The change in free energy is equal to the work done to bring an ion of charge ‘ze’ from the
ionic atmosphere to centre of the ion. Therefore
RT lnf = δWδN ------------------------------1
The work done is given by W = - N z2 e2
3 D× k where k = ( 4 π∈2
D KT ∑ ni z i
2 ¿ ½
But n = cN
1000
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 160
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
W = - N z2 e2
3 D× ( 4 π∈2
D KT ×
N1000 ∑ ci z i
2¿ ½
Let A = - z2 e2
3 D× ( 4 π∈2
D KT ×
11000 ∑ ci z i
2¿ ½
W = N ×A ×√N
δWδN = A ×
δδN ( N
32 )
= A × 32 × N
12
= - z2 e2
3 D× ( 4 π∈2
D KT ×
11000 ∑ ci zi
2¿ ½ × 32 × N
12
= - z2 e2
2 D× ( 4 π∈2
D KT ×
11000 ∑ ci zi
2¿ ½ × N12
= - z2 e2
2 D× ( 4 π∈2
D KT ×
N1000 ∑ ci zi
2¿ ½
𝜇 = ½ × N
1000 ∑ ci z i2
Therefore the above equation becomes
δWδN = - z2 e2
2 D× ( 4 π∈2
D KT × 2μ ) ½
Substituting in equation 1 we get
RT lnf = - z2 e2
2 D× ( 8 π∈2
D KT ) ½ ×√μ
log f = 1
2.303 RT - z2 e2
2D× ( 8 π∈2
D KT ) ½ ×√μ
let A = 1
2.303 RT - e2
2 D× ( 8 π∈2
D KT ) ½
log f = - A z2 √μ
This is known as Debye - Huckle limitng law .
For appreciable concentration
The ionic size factor ( a) should be introduced and hence the above equation becomes
log f = - A z+¿ z−¿
1+aB √ μ¿¿ μ ½
This is the expression for mean ionic coefficient.When polarisation of solvent molecules is involved the equation becomes
log f = - A z+¿ z−¿
1+ aB √ μ¿¿ μ ½ + C √μ
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 161
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
This is known as Huckel equation and C is called salting – out constant. This can be reduced as log f± = -A z+¿ z−¿¿ ¿ μ ½ + C μ
This is known as Debye – Huckel – Bronsted equation
715 DEBYE HUCKEL BRONSTED EQUATION-QUALITATIVE AND
QUANTITATIVE VERIFICATION
Qualitative verification of DH equations:According to limiting law equation the plot of log f against √μ should be a straight
line with slope - Az+ z_ ( I). If the ionic size factor is introduced the plot will be as II. The addition of salting out factor results further increase of activity coefficient by an amount proportional to ionic strength the result is the log f vs √μ curve is of the form III.
log f
√u √μ
Quantitative tests of the Debye –Huckel limiting equation:
1. Influence of valences on activity coefficient:
Debye - Huckle limitng law is
log f = - Az2√ μ where f = activity coefficient
To study the influence of valances on activity coefficient, for number of electrolytes of different valence types activity coefficients in aqueous solution are experimentally determined. The values of ‘ log f’ are plotted against square root of ionic strength.
Since the Debye Huckel constant A for water at 25 oC, is 0.509 the limiting slopes of the plots should be – 0.509.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 162
III
II
I
KCl (uni-uni valent)
CaCl2 ( bi-univalent)
ZnSO4 ( bi-bi valent)
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
log f
√μIt is evident from the graph that the experimental results are in harmony as
expected by Debye – Huckel limiting law.
2.Influence of dielectric constant:According to Debye’s limiting law
log f = - 1.823 × 10 6 × z2
( DT )32× √𝛍 where D is dielectric constant of the medium
For electrolytes of same valence types, the limiting slope of the plot of ‘log f ‘
against √𝛍 at constant temperature should be inversely proportional to D32 .. The activity
coefficient of a given electrolyte in a number of different media of varying dielectric
constant is plotted against square root of ionic strength.
- log f
√μThe experimental results obtained are in agreement with the theoretical
requirements.
3.Influence of temperature:
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 163
KCl (uni-uni valent)
CaCl2 ( bi-univalent)
ZnSO4 ( bi-bi valent)
D = 9
D = 20
D = 80
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
It is not easy to vary the temperature, without changing the dielectric constant and so
these factors may be considered together. The slope of plot of log f against √μ should vary
as 1
( DT )32 where T is the absolute temperature at which the activity coefficients are
measured. The experimental results obtained for liquid NH3 at – 75 0 C are in agreement
with the theoretical requirements.
815REDOX REACTION:
A redox (oxidation-reduction) reaction is any chemical reaction in which the
oxidation
number of a molecule, atom, or ion changes by gaining or losing an electron.
An example of a redox reaction is the thermite reaction, in which iron atoms
in ferric oxide lose (or give up) O atoms to Al atoms, producing Al2O3.
Fe2O3(s)+2Al(s)→Al2O3(s)+2Fe(l)
915CELL POTENTIAL,
Electrode potential is defined as the tendency of the metal to undergo
oxidation(loss of electron) or reduction(gain of electron), when it is in contact
with its own salt solution. If the metal undergoes oxidation, the electrode
potential is called oxidation potential. If the metal undergoes reduction then, the
potential developed is called reduction potential.
Standard electrode potential:
It is defined as the tendency of the metal to undergo oxidation or reduction when
it is in contact with its salt solution with 1M concentration and 250C and at 1atm
pressure. It is denoted as E0.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 164
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
1015 GALVANIC CELL,
These are cells in which electricity is generated due to chemical reaction . It
differs from chemical cells in the following way,
Half-cell. Each half of an electrochemical cell, where oxidation occurs and the half
where reduction occurs, is called the half cell.
Cell diagram or Representation of a Cell
A cell diagram is an abbreviated symbolic depiction of an electrochemical cell. For this
purpose, we will consider that a cell consists of two half-cells. Each half-cell is again made of
a metal electrode in contact with metal ion in solution.
IUPAC Conventions.
1. Anode half-cell is written on the left and cathode half-cell on the right.
2. The two half-cells are separated by a double vertical line (salt bridge) in between
3 The double vertical line represents the salt bridge, permitting ion flow while preventing the
electrolyte from mixing
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 165
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
4.The electrode in anode half-cell is on the left, while in cathode it is on the right of the
metal ion.
5. a single vertical line (|) represents a phase boundary between metal electrode and ion
solution (electrolyte).
Thus the two half-cells in a voltaic cell are indicated as
Zn | Zn2+ | | Cu2+ | Cu
Anode Half-Cell Cathode Half-Cell
(5) The symbol for an inert electrode, like the platinum electrode is often enclosed in a
bracket. For example,
Mg | Mg2+ | | H+ | H2(Pt)
(6) The value of emf of a cell is written on the right of the cell diagram.
Thus a zinc-copper cell has emf 1.1 V and is represented as
Zn | ZnSO4 | | CuSO4 | Cu E = + 1.1 V
S.NO CHEMICAL CELL ELECTROCHEMICAL CELL
1 Those cells in which chemical reaction
takes place, because of electric current
are called chemical cells.
Those cells in which electricity is generated
due to chemical reaction ,is called as
electrochemical cells.
2 Electrical energy is converted to
chemical energy.
Chemical energy is converted to
electrochemical energy.
3 Positive electrode – Anode
Negative electrode – Cathode
Positive electrode – Cathode
Negative electrode – Anode
4. Example: electrolytic cell Example: Denial cell, Lechanche cell
1115 ELECTROLYTIC CELL,
An electrolytic cell is an electrochemical cell that drives a non-
spontaneous redox reaction through the application of electrical energy.
They are often used to decompose chemical compounds, in a process
called electrolysis.
. Electroplating (e.g. of copper, silver, nickel or chromium) is done using an electrolytic cell.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 166
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
1215 NERNST EQUATION FOR CELL POTENTIAL OF ELECTROLYTE.
(Effect of concentration on Electrode potential )
For any redox reaction the change in free energy is given by Vant Hoff
equation as
∆G = ∆G0 + RT ln[ P][ R]
w here ∆G is change in free energy,
∆G0 is change in free energy at standard condition
R is gas constant,
T is temperature.
If ‘ n’ electrons are transferred and if F denotes the faraday of charge. ,E denotes the
potential then the free energy during the reaction is given by ∆G = - nEF. where the negative
sign indicates that the free energy decreases.
Similarly ∆G0 = -nE0F where E0 is the standard electrode potential.
Substituting in equation 1 we get,
-nEF = -nE0F + RT ln [ P][ R]
Dividing equation 2 by –nF we get
E = E0 - RTnF ln
[ P][ R]
This is the general Nernst equation for any redox reaction.
Case -1
Consider a redox reaction: Mn+ + ne- M
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 167
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Applying Nernst equation we get,
E = E0 - RTnF ln [ M ]
¿ ¿¿
= E0 – 2.303 RTnF log [ M ]
¿¿¿
Since [M] >> [Mn+], assuming [M] = 1. We get
E = E0 – 2.303 RTnF log
1M n+¿¿
Therefore E = E0 + 2.303 RTnF log [Mn+]
At 250C, T = 298 ; R = 8.314 ; F = 96450. Substituting all these values in above
equation we get
E = E0 + 0.0591
n log [Mn+]
This is the Nernst equation for a reduction reaction at 250C.
Case -2
For oxidation reaction M Mn+ + ne- , the Nernst equation becomes
E = E0 - RTnF ln ¿¿¿
Since [M] >> [Mn+] and assuming [M] = 1. At 250C
E = E0 – 0.0591
n log [Mn+]
APPLICATIONS:
1.To determine the electrode potential ,at any given concentration.
Problem : What is the potential of a half-cell consisting of zinc electrode in 0.01 M
ZnSO4 solution 25oC. Eo = 0.763 V. [0.8221 V]
2. To determine the emf of a cell.
Ecell = Eright – E left
Problem : Calculate the emf of the cell. Zn | Zn2+ (0.001 M) || Ag+ (0.1 M) | Ag.The
standard potential of Ag/Ag+ half-cell is + 0.80 V and Zn/Zn2+ is–0.76 V. [1.56 V]
Problem : Calculate the E.M.F. of the zinc - silver cell at 25oC when [Zn2+] = 0.10 M
and [Ag+] = 10 M. (Eo cell at 25oC = 1.56 volt]
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 168
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Problem : Calculate the standard e.m.f. of the reaction Fe3+ + 3e– Fe(s). Given the
e.m.f. values of Fe3+ + e Fe2+ and Fe2+ + 2e Fe(s) as + 0.771V and –0.44 V
respectively.
3.Calculation of Equilibrium constant for the cell reaction
The Nernst equation for a cell is
Ecell = Eocell – 0.059
n log K
log K = n × E0
0.059
Problem : The standard electrode potentials of the half cells Ag+ / Ag and Fe3+,
Fe2+ / Pt are
0.7991 V and 0.771 V respectively. Calculate the equilibrium constant of the
reaction :
Ag(s) + Fe3+ Ag+ + Fe2+
1315 ELECTRODE EQUILIBRIUM
1415THERMODYNAMIC OF ELECTRODES AND ELECTRODE
POTENTIAL,
An electrochemical cell contains three open thermodynamic systems that, in
dynamic equilibrium, equalize their electrochemical potentials with that of their
surrounding by forming an electric-double-layer-capacitor at the interface of the
electrolyte with each of the two electrodes.
Since the electrode/electrolyte interfaces are heterojunctions, the
electrochemical potentials or Fermi levels of the two materials that contact the
electrolyte at the two electrodes determine the voltage of a cell.
The voltage is the sum of the voltages of the two interfacial electric-double-
layer capacitors at the two electrode/electrolyte interfaces.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 169
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
1515 ELECTROCHEMICAL CELLS.[ CONCENTRATION CELLS]
Those galvanic cells in which electrical energy is produced only due to
difference in concentration, are called concentration cells
Let the concentration of the electrolyte in right side electrode is C2 and that of
left side electrode is C1 then
Eright = E0 + 0.0591
n log [C2]
Eleft = E0 + 0.0591
n log [C1]
Ecell = Eright – E left
= 0.0591
n log [C2]- + 0.0591
n log [C1]
emf = 0.059
n log C2
C1
1616 ELECTROMOTIVE FORCE
Electromotive force is the electric potential generated by either a electrochemical
cell or a changing magnetic field. It is also known as voltage.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 170
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
UNIT VQUANTUM CHEMISTRY – IV
1. Approximation Methods
2. Perturbation Method
3. Application Of Perturbation Method To Hydrogen
4. Application Of Perturbation Method To Helium Atom
5. Variation Method
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 171
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
6. Application Of Variation Method To Hydrogen
7. Application Of Variation Method To Helium Atom
8. R.S. Coupling
9. Term Symbols For Atoms In The Ground State
10. Slater Orbital
11. Hf –Scf Methods
12. Born – Heimer Approximation
13. Valence Bond Theory For Hydrogen Molecule
14. Laco –Mo Theory For Di Atomic Molecules
15. Polyatomic Molecules
16. Concept Of Hybridization
17. Huckel Theory For Conjugated Molecules
1. Ethylene
2. Butadiene
3. Benzene
18. Semi Emprical Methods
118 APPROXIMATION METHODS
Need for approximation methods:
Schrodinger wave equation can be solved for systems having only one electron. But
if an atom or molecule has many interacting electrons , we can not solve Schrodinger
equation. Because there will be more than one potential energy terms. In such a case we
must go for approximation methods.
218 PERTURBATION METHOD
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 172
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
This method involves the determination of eigen functions( Ψ ‘ ) , and eigen values
( E’ ) of the of the perturbed system , in terms of those of the unperturbed (Ψ0 and E 0 )
This method is applied if
1.The system differs only slightly from the unperturbed ( known)system.
2.Energy , wave function and Hamiltonian for the unperturbed system ( E0 , Ψ 0 , and H0 ) are
known.
Example :
1.Normal Hydrogen atom is unperturbed system
When placed in an electric ( Stark effect), it causes perturbation.
When placed in magnetic field (Zeemann effect) it is perturbed system
2.A simple harmonic oscillator is an unperturbed system On the other hand an unharmonic
oscillator is a perturbed system.
There are two types
1. Time independent perturbation method
2. Time dependent perturbation method
Time independent perturbation method
Suppose we have a system with Time independent Hamiltonian H and we are unable
to solve the Schrodinger equation HΨ = E Ψ for the eigen value and eigen function.
There are two cases
1. Non – degenerate case
2. Degenerate case
Time independent non- degenerate perturbation method
Consider a system whose .Energy , wave function and Hamiltonian are known. Let
them be E0 , Ψ 0 , and H0 . If a small perturbation is applied, then
The Hamiltonian is decomposed in to two parts as
H = H0 + λ H’
where H0 is the perturbed part and λ H’ is the perturbation.
Let the eigen values and eigen functions of the unperturbed problem be E10 , E2
0 , E30 , and
Ψ 10 , Ψ 2
0 ,Ψ 30
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 173
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
It is assumed that the eigen functions and the energies can be expressed in the form of
power series as
Ψ = Ψ n0 + λ Ψ n
1 + λ 2 Ψ n2 .........Ψ n
k
E = En0 + λ En
1 + λ2 En2 ..........En
k
Where Ψ nk and En
k are the ‘ k th ‘ order correction in wave function and energy
The Schrodinger equation is given by
HΨ = E Ψ
Substituting the values, and omitting the higher terms
{ H0 + λ H’ }{ Ψ n0 + λ Ψ n
1 + λ 2 Ψ n2 }= { En
0 + λ En1 + λ2 En
2 }{Ψ n0 + λ Ψ n
1 + λ 2 Ψ n2 . }
Expanding
H0Ψ n0
+ H0 λ Ψ n1 + H0 λ 2 Ψ n
2 + λ H’ Ψ n0 + λ 2H’ Ψ n
1 + λ 3 H’ Ψ n2
= En0 Ψ n
0 + En0λ Ψ n
1 +En0 λ2Ψ n
2 + λ En1 Ψ n
0 + λ2 En1 Ψ n
1 + λ3 En1 Ψ n
2 + λ2 En1 Ψ n
0 + λ3 En1 Ψ n
1 + λ4 En2
Ψ n2
Neglecting the higher terms (λ3 and λ4 terms )
H0Ψ n0
+ H0 λ Ψ n1 + H0 λ 2 Ψ n
2 + λ H’ Ψ n0 + λ 2H’ Ψ n
1
= En0 Ψ n
0 + En0λ Ψ n
1 +En0 λ2 Ψ n
2 .+ λ En1 Ψ n
0 + λ2 En1 Ψ n
1 + λ2 En1 Ψ n
0
rearranging
H0Ψ n0
+ λ [ H0Ψ n1 + H’Ψ n
0 ] + λ 2 [ H0 Ψ n2 + H’ Ψ n
1 ]
= En0 Ψ n
0 + λ [ En0 Ψ n
1 + En1 Ψ n
0 ] + λ2 [ En0 Ψ n
2 .+ En1 Ψ n
1 + En1 Ψ n
0
]
Comparing constant term , the coefficient of λ and coefficient of λ 2 we get the Schrodinger
equation
H0Ψ n0
= En0 Ψ n
0 : unperturbed system.
H0Ψ n1 + H’Ψ n
0 = En0 Ψ n
1 + En1 Ψ n
0 : first order perturbation
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 174
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
H0 Ψ n2 + H’ Ψ n
1 = En0 Ψ n
2 .+ En1 Ψ n
1 +En1 Ψ n
0 : Second order perturbation
Evaluation of First order energy:
The Schrodinger equation for first order perturbation is
H0Ψ n1 + H’Ψ n
0 = En0 Ψ n
1 + En1 Ψ n
0
The unknown function Ψ n1
can be expanded in terms o known functions
Ψ 10 , Ψ 2
0 ,Ψ 30 ,…….Ψ m
0
Ψ n 1 = ∑0
m
Cm Ψ m0
Substituting in the above equation,
H0 ∑0
m
Cm Ψ m0 + H1 Ψ n
0 = En0 ∑
0
m
Cm Ψ m0 + En
1 Ψ n0
H0 Ψ m0 ∑
0
m
Cm+ H1 Ψ n0 = En
0 Ψ m ∑0
m
Cm0 + En
1 Ψ n0
[Rearranging]
since H0 Ψ m0 = Em
0 Ψ m 0 the above equation becomes
Em0 Ψ m 0
∑0
m
Cm + H1 Ψ n0 = En
0 Ψ m ∑0
m
Cm + En1 Ψ n
0
Em0 Ψ m
0 ∑0
m
Cm - En0 Ψ m ∑
0
m
Cm + H1 Ψ n0 = En
1 Ψ n0
[Rearranging]
Ψ m0 ∑
0
m
Cm { Em0 −En
0 } + H1 Ψ n0 = En
1 Ψ n0
------------------5
Multiplying the above equation by Ψ n0 from the left and integrate
∫Ψ n0Ψ m
0 ∑0
m
Cm {Em0 −En
0 } dτ+ ∫Ψ n0 H 1 Ψ n
0 dτ = ∫Ψ n0 En
1 Ψ n0
dτ
[ ∫Ψ n0 En
1 Ψ n0
=En1 ∫Ψ n
0Ψ n0
but ∫Ψ n0 H1 Ψ n
0dτ ≠ H 1∫Ψ n0Ψ n
0dτ ]
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 175
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Therefore the above equation becomes
∫Ψ n0Ψ m
0 ∑0
m
Cm {Em0 −En
0 }) dτ + ∫Ψ n0 H1 Ψ n
0 dτ = En1∫Ψ n
0 Ψ n0 dτ
but ∫Ψ n0Ψ m
0 = 0,
∫Ψ n0Ψ n
0 = 1
Therefore the above equation becomes
0 + ∫Ψ n0 H1 Ψ n
0 = En1
∴ En1
= ∫Ψ n0 H 1 Ψ n
0
This is the expression for first order perturbed energy .This shows that the first order
perturbation energy for a non-degenerate system is just the perturbation function
averaged over the corresponding unperturbed state of the system
Thus the first order energy is
En = En0 + λ ∫Ψ n
0 H1 Ψ n0 dT
Evaluation of First order wave function:
From equation 5
Ψ m 0 ∑0
m
Cm { Em0 −En
0 }+ Ψ n0 H1 = Ψ n
0 En1
Multiplying the above equation by Ψ m0 from the right and integrate
∫Ψ m0 ∑
0
m
Cm {Em0 −En
0 }Ψ m0 dτ + ∫Ψ n
0 H1 Ψ m0 dτ = ∫ Ψ n
0 En1 Ψ m
0 dτ
[ ∫Ψ n0 En
1 Ψ n0
=En1 ∫Ψ n
0Ψ n0 but ∫Ψ n
0 H1 Ψ n0dτ
≠ H1∫Ψ n0Ψ n
0dτ ]
Therefore the above equation becomes
∑0
m
Cm {Em0 −En
0 } ∫Ψ m0 Ψ m
0 dτ + ∫Ψ n0 H1 Ψ m
0 dτ = En1 ∫ Ψ n
0 Ψ m0 dτ
But ∫Ψ m0 Ψ m
0 = 1,
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 176
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
∫ Ψ n0 Ψ m
0 = 0
Therefore the above equation becomes
∑0
m
Cm {Em0 −En
0 } + ∫Ψ m0 H 1 Ψ n
0 = 0
∴ Cm = - ∫Ψ m
0 H 1Ψ n0 dT
{Em0 −En
0 }
Substituting in 4, we get Ψ n = - ∑m=0
m ∫Ψ m0 H 1Ψ n
0d T
{Em0 −En
0 } Ψ m0
This shows that the first order correction in wave function
1. is always negative
2. can be determined from the eigen function and eigen values of unperturbed system.
Thus the first order wave function is Ψ n = Ψ n0 - λ ∑
m=0
m ∫Ψ m0 H 1Ψ n
0 d T
{Em0 −En
0 } Ψ m
0
318 APPLICATION OF PERTURBATION METHOD TO HYDROGEN
Perturbation theorem is applied to hydrogen atom to find the corrected ( perturbed )
energy and the corresponding perturbed wave function It involves the following steps.
1. Making perturbation:
Normal hydrogen atom is unperturbed but when it is kept in electric field it is
subjected to perturbation.
2.Writing the expression for wave function
The value of Ψ for hydrogen atom is identified Ψ =( e−r
√ π )2. Identifying the perturbed Hamiltonian:
The application of electric field changes the Hamiltonian of hydrogen atom
H= H0 + H ’ . In this H’ is the perturbed Hamiltonian.
3. Calculation of first order perturbed energy.
The perturbed energy is calculated by the following formula
The first order perturbed energy is given by E1 = ∫Ψ 0 H ’Ψ 0 dτ
In spherical co-ordinates E = ∫Ψ 0 H ’Ψ 0 r2 dr∫0
π
sin θ d θ∫0
2π
dφ
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 177
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
4. Adding with the ground state energy:
The perturbed energy is added with the ground state energy
For example When a uniform electric field along Z- axis is applied, the perturbation term
is given as
H ‘ = Fz.
The first order perturbed energy is given by E1 = ∫Ψ 0 H ’Ψ 0 dτ
In spherical co-ordinates E = ∫Ψ 0 H ’Ψ 0 r2 dr∫0
π
sin θ d θ∫0
2π
dφ and z = r cos θ
= ∫0
∞
( e−r
√ π )(F rcosθ)( e−r
√ π )r2dr∫0
π
sin θ d θ∫0
2 π
dφ
= Fπ ∫
0
∞
e−2 r (rcos θ)r2 dr∫0
π
sin θ dθ∫0
2 π
dφ
= eFπ ∫
0
∞
e−2 r r3 dr∫0
π
cos θ sin θ d θ∫0
2 π
dφ
= eFπ ∫
0
∞
e−2 r r3 dr 12∫0
π
sin 2θ d θ∫0
2 π
dφ [ sin 2x = 2 sin x cos x ]
= eFπ [
3!24 ] [ ½ (
−cos2 θ2 ) ¿0
π ( 2 π )
∫0
∞
xn e−ax dx= n!(a)n+1
= eFπ [
3!24 ] [ ½ ( 0)
= 0
This shows that there is no first order effect.
418 APPLICATION OF PERTURBATION METHOD TO HELIUM ATOM
Helium atom contains two electrons and one Helium nucleus. In this atom, besides an
attractive interaction between electron and nucleus there is a repulsive interaction between
the two electrons.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 178
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Let the distance between nucleus and electron-1 and electron-2 be r1 and r2
respectively. Let r12 represents the inter electronic distance. The potential energy for a system
of two electrons, and a nucleus of charge +e is
V = - 2r1
- 2r2
+ 1r12
The Hamiltonian(H) for He atom (in a.u) H = - 12 ∇1
2 -
12 ∇1
2 - 2r1
- 2r2
+ 1r12
The first two terms are operator for kinetic energy , the third and fourth terms are potential
energy of attraction between electron and nucleus and the last term is the potential energy of
inter electron repulsion. Because of this term, Schrodinger equation for the atom can not be
solved and we use approximation method
Perturbation method separates the Hamiltonian in to two parts namely H0 and H1
H = Ho +¿ H1
Ho = -{ 12 [ ∇1
2 + ∇1
2 ] -
2r1
- 2r2
is the Hamiltonian for
unperturbed system
H1 = 1
r12
The wave function of unperturbed( zeroth order) system is given by
Ψ 0 = √ Z3
π e−Z r 1× √ Z3
π e−Z r 2
= Z3
π×e−Z r 1e−Zr 2
The corresponding zeroth order energy is E0 = - Z2 (a.u)
The first order perturbation energy is the average value of the perturbation function
H’ = 1r12
, over the unperturbed state of the system
E1 = ∫Ψ 0 H ’Ψ 0 dτ
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 179
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
= ∫ Z3
π× e−Z r1 e−Z r2 ×( 1
r12)× Z3
π× e−Z r1 e−Z r 2 dτ
= ( Z3
π )2
∫¿¿ dτ
The volume element in spherical co ordinates is dτ = r12dr1sinθ1dφ1 r2
2dr2sinθ2dφ2
upon integration we get E 1 = 58 Z ,
The unperturbed energy is given by E 0 = - Z2
Therefore the total energy E = E 0 + E 1
= - Z2 + 58 Z (a.u)
= - 4 + 58 ×2 (a.u)
= - 114 × (27.2 ) eV
= -74.8 eV
This is the ground state energy of Helium atom. Experimental value is -78.98 Ev
518 VARIATION METHOD
Advantage over perturbation method:
It does not require that there should be a similar problem that has been solved
previously.
Method:
This method says that with any trial function Ψ, the expectation value of energy E
will be equal to or greater than the true value E0, which is the lowest energy eigen value
of the Hamiltonian of the system E ≥ E0
i.e if we choose number of wave functions, Ψ 1, Ψ2, Ψ3 etc and calculate the values
E1,E2,E3 , corresponding to them, then each of the values E , will be greater than the energy
E0.
Steps:
1. Choose series of trial functions that depend some arbitrary parameters α, β etc
called variational parameter.
2. Calculate E in each case, by postulate of quantum mechanics.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 180
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
E = ∫Ψ H Ψ ¿dτ
∫Ψ Ψ ¿ dτ
3. Minimize E with respect to the parameter used.
4. Pick up the lowest value that would be closest to the true value .
5. The trial function corresponding to that value will be the best function.
Proof:
Consider the wave function Ψ, which is a linear combination of normalised and
orthogonal eigen functions φ1 and φ2 with normalization constants a1 ,a2 respectively.
Ψ = a1 φ1 +a2 φ2
From postulates of Quantum mechanics,
E = ∫Ψ H Ψ ¿dτ
∫Ψ Ψ ¿ dτsubstituting the values of Ψ , we get
E = ∫(a 1φ 1+a 2φ 2) H ¿¿¿
Since Ψ is real function, Ψ * can be replaced by Ψ itself∴ E = ∫(a 1 φ 1+a 2 φ 2) H ¿¿¿
= a1
2∫φ 1 H φ 1 dτ+a22∫ φ 2 H φ2 dτ+a1 a 2∫φ 1 H φ 2dτ +a 1 a2∫φ 2 H φ 1 dτ
a12∫φ1
2d τ+a22∫φ2
2d τ+2a1 a2∫ (φ1φ 2)d τ
∫φ1 H φ 1dτ = E1
∫φ 2 H φ 2dτ = E2
∫φ1 H φ 2dτ = 0
∫φ 2 H φ 1dτ = 0
∫φ12 dτ = 1
∫φ22 d τ = 1 ,
∫φ1φ 2 dτ = 0
Substituting in the above equation E = a1
2 E1+a22 E 2
a12+a2
2
Subtracting E0 on both sides E - E0 = a1
2 E1+a22 E 2
a12+a2
2 - E0
= a1
2 E1+a22 E 2−E0(a1
2+a22)
a12+a2
2 [ taking LCM]
Taking only Denominator, E - E0 = a12 E 1+a2
2 E 2−E0(a12+a2
2)
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 181
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
= a12 E 1+a2
2 E 2−E0 a12−E0 a2
2 ¿
= a12 ( E1 - E0 ) + a2
2 ( E2 - E0 )
Since E0 is the lowest energy of the system, ( E1 - E0 ) and ( E2 - E0 ) are positive .
Therefore
E - E0 > 0
E > E0
This shows that the variation method provides an upper bound to the ground
state energy of the system.
SECULAR EQUATION:
Consider the wave function Ψ, which is a linear combination of normalised and
orthogonal eigen functions φ1 and φ2 with normalization constants a1 ,a2 respectively.
Ψ = a1 φ1 +a2 φ2
From postulates of Quantum mechanics,
E = ∫Ψ H Ψ ¿dτ
∫Ψ Ψ ¿ dτsubstituting the values of Ψ , we get
E = ∫(a 1 φ 1+a 2 φ 2) H ¿¿¿ ---------------1
Since Ψ is real function, Ψ * can be replaced by Ψ itself∴ E = ∫(a 1φ 1+a2 φ 2) H ¿¿¿
= a1
2 H11+a22 H22+2 a1 a2 H 12
a12 S11+a2
2 S22+2 a1 a2 S12
E ( a12 S11+a2
2 S22+2a 1 a 2 S12¿ = a12 H11+a2
2 H22 +2 a1 a 2H12
Differentiating with respect to a1
∂ E∂ a1
( a12 S11+a2
2 S22+2 a1 a2 S12¿ + E ( 2a1 S11+0+2a2 S12 ¿
= 2a1 H11+0 +2 a 2 H12
∂ E∂ a1
= 0
Therefore the above equation becomes
E ( 2a1 S11+2a2 S12¿ = 2a1 H 11+2 a 2H 12
E (a1 S11+a2 S12 ¿ = a1 H 11+a2 H12 [ dividing by 2 ]
Ea1 S11+E a2 S12 = a1 H 11+a 2 H 12
a1¿ ) + a2¿¿ - E S12¿ = 0
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 182
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Similarly, a1¿ ) + a2¿¿ - ES22¿ = 0
These are called secular equations.
This shows that a trial function depends linearly on the variation parameter leads to
secular equation and secular determinant.
618 APPLICATION OF VARIATION METHOD TO HYDROGEN
Variation theorem is applied to hydrogen atom to find the minimum ground state
energy and the corresponding acceptable wave function It involves the following steps.
1. Selection of wave function
Many acceptable wave functions , in terms of variation parameter are chosen to calculate the
energy
2. Writing Hamiltonian:
Hamiltonian operator of hydrogen atom in spherical co-ordinates is
H = −12r 2
ddr
¿ ) - 1r ( in atomic units).
3. Calculation of energy in terms of variation parameter.
The expectation value is calculated by quantum mechanics
E = ∫Ψ H Ψ ¿dτ
∫Ψ Ψ ¿ dτ
4. Estimation of variation parameter:
After getting energy in terms of variation parameter, the expression should be to
minimised. To do this the function should be differentiated with respect to the parameter
and equated to zero. From this the value of the parameter can be obtained.
5. Calculation of energy:
The value of parameter should be substituted in the energy expression to obtain the
exact value of energy.
For example the acceptable wave functions for hydrogen atom with ‘a’ as variation parameter
are
Ψ = e−ar, Ψ =e−a r2
, Ψ = r e−ar
Hamiltonian operator of hydrogen atom in spherical co-ordinates is
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 183
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
H = −12r 2
ddr
¿ ) - 1r ( in atomic units).
The expectation value is calculated by quantum mechanics
E = ∫Ψ H Ψ ¿dτ
∫Ψ Ψ ¿ dτ
= ∫
0
∞
Ψ H Ψ r2 dr∫0
π
sinθ dθ∫0
2π
dφ
∫Ψ Ψ ¿r2 dr∫0
π
sin θ dθ∫0
2 π
dφ d𝛕 = [r2 dr∫
0
π
sin θ d θ∫0
2 π
dφ¿
= ∫
0
∞
(e−ar )(−12 r2
ddr (r2 d
dr )−1r )( e−ar ) r2 dr∫
0
π
sin θ d θ∫0
2 π
dφ
∫ ( e−ar ) (e−ar ) r2 dr∫0
π
sinθ d θ∫0
2 π
dφ
Similarly for other functions also energy is calculated.
For the wave functions Ψ =e−ar , the expectation value of energy is E=¿is ( a2
2 - a )
For Ψ = e−a r 2
is E=¿ 3∝2 -√ 8 α
π where α is the parameter
For Ψ = r e−ar the expectation value of energy is E=α2
6 -
α2 .
To find the parameter ’a’ , E should be minimized .
Its first order derivative with respect to the parameter ’a’ is
dEda = a – 1
This should be equal to zero.
dEda = 0
0 = a – 1
∴ a = 1
Substituting the value of a , we get
E = ½ - 1
= - 0.5
Similar treatment should be done for other energies and the function which gives lowest
energy is the best wave function.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 184
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
EXAMPLE -2
The ground state energy of H- atom can be calculated using variation method.
Consider the wave function is Ψ = e−ar, where ‘a’ is the variation parameter. The
Hamiltonian for H- atom in spherical co ordinate is H = (−12 r2
ddr (r2 d
dr )−1r )
The expectation value is calculated by quantum mechanics
E = ∫Ψ H Ψ ¿dτ
∫Ψ Ψ ¿ dτ
= ∫
0
∞
Ψ H Ψ r2 dr∫0
π
sinθ dθ∫0
2π
dφ
∫Ψ Ψ ¿r2 dr∫0
π
sin θ dθ∫0
2 π
dφ d𝛕 = [r2 dr∫
0
π
sin θ d θ∫0
2 π
dφ¿
= ∫
0
∞
(e−ar )(−12 r2
ddr (r2 d
dr )−1r )( e−ar ) r2 dr∫
0
π
sin θ d θ∫0
2 π
dφ
∫ ( e−ar ) (e−ar ) r2 dr∫0
π
sinθ dθ∫0
2 π
dφ
Since the 𝛉 term and 𝛗 term are constants, they can be cancelled. Therefore the above
equation becomes, E = ∫
0
∞
(e−ar )(−12 r2
ddr (r2 d
dr )− 1r )( e−ar ) r2 dr
∫ ( e−ar ) (e−ar ) r2 dr
= a2
2 - a [Upon integration]
To find the parameter ’a’ , E should be minimized .
Its first order derivative with respect to the parameter ’a’ is
dEda = a – 1
This should be equal to zero.
dEda = 0
0 = a – 1
∴ a = 1
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 185
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Substituting the value of a , we get
E = ½ - 1
= - 0.5 this is the true value.
Problem : Use the functions Ψ = e−ar to calculate the ground state energy of H-atom by
variation
method. Given ∫ e−ar H e−ar dτ = a−28 a2 and ∫ e−ar e−ardτ =
14 a3
Solution:
The expectation value is calculated by quantum mechanics
E = ∫Ψ H Ψ ¿dτ
∫Ψ Ψ ¿ dτ
= a−28 a2 × 4 a3
1
= (a−2 )a
2
= a2
2 - a
To find the parameter ’a’ , E should be minimized .
Its first order derivative with respect to the parameter ’a’ is
dEda = a – 1
This should be equal to zero.
dEda = 0
0 = a – 1
∴ a = 1
Substituting the value of a , we get
E = ½ - 1
¿−0.5
718 APPLICATION OF VARIATION METHOD TO HELIUM ATOM
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 186
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Helium atom contains two electrons and one Helium nucleus. In this atom, besides an
attractive interaction between electron and nucleus there is a repulsive interaction between
the two electrons.
Let the distance between nucleus and electron-1 and electron-2 be r1 and r2
respectively. Let r12 represents the inter electronic distance. The potential energy for a system
of two electrons, and a nucleus of charge +e is
V = - 2r1
- 2r2
+ 1r12
The Hamiltonian(H) for He atom (in a.u) H = -{ 12 [ ∇1
2 + ∇1
2 ] -
2r1
- 2r2
+ 1r12
The first two terms are operator for kinetic energy , the third and fourth terms are
potential energy of attraction between electron and nucleus and the last term is the potential
energy of inter electron repulsion
The variational method approximation requires that a trial wavefunction with one or
more adjustable parameters be chosen.
1. Choosing Trial Wave function
The calculations begin with a wave function in which both electrons are placed in a
hydrogenic orbital with scale factor α. The wave function is given by
Ψ(1,2)=Φ(1)Φ(2)
= a3
π e−α (r 1+r2)
2. Calculation of energy in terms of variation parameter
E = ∫Ψ H Ψ dτ
= ∫Ψ [−{12[∇1
2+∇22]− 2
r1− 2
r2+ 1
r12]Ψ dτ
= −12 ∫Ψ ∇1
2Ψ dτ −12 ∫Ψ ∇2
2Ψ dτ - ∫Ψ [ 2r1 ¿
¿ ]Ψ dτ - ∫Ψ [ 2r2
]Ψ dτ + ∫Ψ [ 1r12
]Ψ dτ
Substituting the values and on integration we get
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 187
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
E = a2 - 278 a
Where ‘a ‘ is variation parameter
3.Determination of variation parameter
E = a2 - 278 a
Differentiating with respect to ‘a’
dEda = 2a –
278
To minimize this put dEda =0
2a = 278 -
∴ a = 2716
Substituting we get
E = (2716
¿¿2 – (278 ) ×(
2716
¿
= 2716 (
2716 -
278 )
= 2716 (
−2716 )
= −729256
= - 2.8476 a.u and the experimentally determined ground state energy is Eexp=−2.903
818 R.S. COUPLING [RUSSELL – SAUNDERS COUPLING ( LS –
COUPLING)
Combination of orbital angular momenta(L) and spin (S) of individual electrons is
called
RS – coupling. Total electronic angular momentum (J) is given by the.
J = L + S
Where L = total orbital angular momentum vector = ∑ Li
S = total spin angular momentum vector = ∑ Si
The value of L is given by L = ( l1 + l2), ( l1 + l2 -1)…. (l1-l2) where l1 and l2 are
azimuthal quantum numbers This series is known as Clebsch – Gordon series.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 188
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
918 TERM SYMBOLS FOR ATOMS IN THE GROUND STATE
It is represented by writing the spin multiplicity as superscripts to the left of the
spectral state (term letters) with angular momentum quantum number (J) value as subscript
to the right.
TERM SYMBOL = spin multiplicity spectral state J
To find the Spectral state
Value of ‘ L’ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
TERM LETTER S P D F G H I
For example if the value of L is 0, then the term letter is S.
if the value of L is 1, then the term letter is P and so on.
1. Find the ground state term symbol for d1 ion
Solution:
+2 +1 0 -1 -2
↑
Spin multiplicity = 2s + 1
= 2 ( ½ ) + 1
= 2 ( doublet)
L = 2
J = 2 + ½
= 5/2
Therefore the ground state symbol 2 D 5/2
2.. Find the ground state term symbol for d2 ion
Solution:
+2 +1 0 -1 -2
↑ ↑
s = ½ +½
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 189
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
= 1
Spin multiplicity = 2s + 1
= 2 (1 ) + 1
= 3 ( Triplet)
L = 2(1) + 1(1)
= 2 + 1
= 3
Spectral state is F
J = L+S, L+S -1, L+S-2…
= 4,3,2,1
Therefore the ground state symbol 3 F
1018 SLATER ORBITAL [ SLATER TYPE ORBITALS]
Hydrogen like orbitals are given by
Ψ nlm = N r F(r) e−Zr
n Y lm ( θ,φ)
Here N is the normalisation constant, Rnl is the radial function and Y lm
( θ,φ) is the angular part ( spherical harmonics)Slater suggested an orbital by taking into consideration ,the shielding effect of the
nucleus by the electrons.it is given by
Ψ’ nlm = N r n-1 e−Z ' r
n ' Y lm ( θ,φ)
Where n’ is the effective principal quantum number and Z’ is the effective nuclear charge.Functions of these oritals are called ‘Slater Type Orbitals’ (STO)
1. STO differ from H- like orbitals only in radial part.2. Unlike H-like orbitals, STOs have no radial nodes3. STO’s are not mutually orthogonal
SLATER RULES
1. The effective principal quantum number (n’) is related to the quantum number (n) as
follows
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 190
n 1 2 3 4 5 6
n' 1 2 3 3.7 4 4.2
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
2. The effective nuclear charge (Z’) is related with actual atomic number as
Z’ = Z-S, where ‘S’ is screening constant
3. Screening constant is calculated as follows.
1. The orbitals are grouped as
(1s), (2s,2p), (3s,3p), (3d),(4s,4p),(4d)
2. No contribution from electrons in groups higher than , the group in question
For example For 3s or 3p electrons , no contribution from 3d,4s,4p,4d
3. Each electron in the same group contributes 0.35
4. Electron in 1s group contributes 0.30 only
5. In case of ‘s’ or ‘p’ group, each electron in the next lower group contributes 0.85
6. For electron in ‘d’ or ‘f’ the contribution from each inner electron is 1.0
7. Each electron in groups lower by two or more numbers from the one in question
contributes 1.0
1. Determine the effective nuclear charge for the 1s electron in He.
Electronic configuration of He : 1s2. There are two electrons. The effective nuclear charge
on one electron = 1×(0.30) [ rule 4]
S = 0.3
Z’ = Z-S [ Z is the atomic number of He =2]
= 2-0.3
= 1.7
The effective nuclear charge for the 1s electron in He = 1.7 ( no unit)
2. Determine the effective nuclear charge of 2s and 2p electrons in C.
Electronic configuration of C : 1s2. 2s2 2p 2
These are grouped as (1s) (2s,2p)
There are 4 electrons in set 2
. The effective nuclear charge on one electron = 3×(0.35) [ rule 3 for remaining 3 electrons
+ 2(0.85)[ rule 5 for 2 electrons]
= 2.75
Z’ = Z-S [ Z is the atomic number of C =6]
= 6- 2.75
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 191
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
= 3.25
The effective nuclear charge for the 2s electron in C = 3.25 ( no unit)
Problem1 :Find the expression for STO for 2s, orbital in Nitrogen atom.. The normalisation constant is ‘N’. Compare with Hydrogen – like orbital.Solution:
Slater Type Orbitals is given by Ψ’ nlm = N’ r n-1 e−Z ' r
n ' Y lm ( θ,φ)
For 2s orbital, n= 2 , l=0. ∴
Ψ’ 200 = N r 2-1 e−Z ' r
n ' Y lm ( θ,φ)
= N r 2-1 e−Z ' r
n ' ×1
√4 π [ Y 0
0 ( θ,φ) = 1
√4 π]
To find Z’ ( effective nuclear charge of 2s electrons in N).
Electronic configuration of N : 1s2. (2s 2p ) 5 , These are grouped as (1s) (2s,2p)
There are 5 electrons in set 2
. The effective nuclear charge on one electron
= 4×(0.35) [ rule 3 for remaining 4 electrons + 2(0.85) [ rule 5 for
2 electrons]
= 3.10
Z’ = Z-S [ Z is the atomic number of N =7]
= 7- 3.1
= 3.9
n'= n=2
Substituting, we get
Ψ’ 200 = N r 2-1 e−3.9 r
2 1
√4 π
= N r e−3.9r
2 1
√4 π This is the expression for STO of N atom∴ Ψ’ 200 = N × (2 - zr ) × e –( zr
2 ) 1√4 π
Slater Type Orbital ΨS 200 = N× r ×e−3.9r
2 × 1
√4 π
Hydrogen like orbital Ψ 200 = N× (2 - 3.9 r ) × e –( 3.9 r2 ) 1
√4 π
Comparison:
There is no node in STO, but in HLO node occurs at 2
3.9
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 192
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Problem 2 Find the expression for STO for 2px, orbital in Nitrogen atom.. The normalisation constant is ‘N’. Compare with Hydrogen – like orbital.Solution:The angular wave function is
Θ l,m = √ 2 l+12
× (l−m ) !(l+m ) !
× Plm ( cos θ ) ×
1√2 π
e imφ
Plm ( cos θ ) =
12l× l!
( 1- cos 2 θ ) m/2 ( d
d (cosθ) ) l+m [cos 2 θ -1 ) l
For 2pz orbital.,l l=1, m=0
P10 =
1211 !
( 1- cos 2 θ ) 0 ( d
d (cosθ) ) [cos 2 θ -1 ) 1× e0
= 12 (
dd (cosθ) ) [cos 2 θ -1 )
= 12 [ 2 cos θ ]
= cos θ
∴ Θ l,m = √ 2(1)+12
× cos θ × 1
√2 π
= √ 32
×1
√2 π cos θ
= √ 3
√ 4 π cos θ
Slater Type Orbital ΨS 200 = N× r ×e−3.9r
2 × √ 3
√ 4 π cos θ
Hydrogen like orbital Ψ 200 = N× (2 - 3.9 r ) × e –( 3.9 r2 ) √ 3
√ 4 π cos θ
Comparison:
There is no node in STO, but in HLO node occurs at 2
3.9
Problem 3 Calculate the average value of ‘r’ for 1s electron of Lithium atom using Slater type orbitals.Solution:
Average of r = ∫Ψ rΨ dT
∫ΨΨ dT
= ∫(N ’rn−1 e−Z 'r
n ' )r ¿¿¿ STO Ψ’ nlm = N’ r n-1 e−Z ' r
n ' Y lm ( θ,φ)
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 193
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
= ∫r2 n−1 e
−2 Z 'rn ' r2 dr
∫ ’ r2 n−2 e−2Z ' r
n ' r2 dr [Y l
m ( θ,φ) will be cancelled]
= ∫ r2n+1 e
−2 Z 'rn ' dr
∫ ’r2 n e−2 Z' r
n ' dr
= (2 n+1)!¿¿
× ¿¿ Formula : ∫0
∞
xn e−ax dx = n!
an+1
= (2n+1 )× 2n !¿¿
× 1
2n! (n+1) ! = (n+1) n!
= (2n+1 )× n
2 z
For lithium atom n = 3, for is orbital Z = z’ – 1(0.3) = 3-0.3 = 2.7
Average of r = 215.4
=3.6
Problem 4 Calculate the first ionisation energy for Li atom on the basis of Slater rules.
Solution:
I.P of Li = E of Li + - E of Li
E= ∑ 12
z2
n2 in a.u = ∑ 13.6 z2
n2 e.v
1118 HF –SCF METHODS HARTREE – FOCK SELF CONSISTENT FIELD
METHOD.
Hamiltonian for’ n’ electron atom is H = - ½ ∑ ∇2 - ∑ zr + ½ ∑ ∑
1rij
The
inter electronic repulsion term (½ ∑ ∑ 1rij
) does not permit separation of Schrodinger
equation in to one electron equations. Hence the product wave function will not yield correct
energy. The best possible wave function is obtained by using a set of orbitals , which are the
solutions of n simultaneous Schrodinger equations.
Hφ = Eφ, H = - 12 ∇2 -
zr + Vi
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 194
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Where Vi represents the potential energy of electron, due to repulsion by all other electrons..
To calculate Vi, Hartree assumed that each electron in the atom moves , in a potential field
of all other electrons. He solved the above equation by iterative technique as follows
Consider the wave function as product of one electron orbitals.
Ψ = (φ1) ( φ2) ( φ3)….
Let electron-1 is moving through the cloud of other electrons. The potential energy
of interaction of electron-1 with all other electrons is given by
V1 = ∑j=2
n ∫φi2d τ
r 1 j where φ is one electron orbital.
On solving the above expression we obtain an improved orbital φ1' .
Now the electron-2 may be considered to move in the field . The new set ( φ1) is
now used to recalculate the potential energy . The potential V2 is calculated as above The
potential energy of interaction of electron-2 with all other electrons is given by
V2 = ∑j=1,3. .
n ∫φ 1' dτr 1 j
where φ is one electron orbital.
On solving the above expression we obtain an improved orbital φ2'
.. Finally we have the wave function as Ψ = (φ1’) ( φ2’) ( φ3’)…. The orbitals are denoted
by ( φ) and are now consistent with the potential field . These are called Self Consistent
Field orbitals ( SCF)Using this value the hamiltonian and hence the energy are calculated.
The cycle of iteration is continued till we get the same value as in the earlier step .
Ψ = φ2 × φ2
Use φ2
solve
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 195
[ - ½ ∇12 - ½ ∇2
2 - Zr1
- Zr1
+ ∫ (φ2 )2 d τr12
] φ1 = E φ1
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Use φ1;
NO
yes
YES
NOT FOR EXAMINATION
Apply iterative method F( x) = x2 – 6x +5x2 – 6x +5 = 0 6x = x2 +5
x = x2+5
6
x1= f(0) = (0 )2+56
= 0. 83
x2 = f( 0.833) = (0.83 )2+56
= 0.68+5
6 =
0.94
x2 = f( 0.94) = (0.94 )2+56
= 0.88+5
6 =
0.98
x2 = f( 0.98) = (0.98 )2+56
= 0.96+5
6 =
0.99
x2 = f( 0.99) = (0.99 )2+56
= 0.92+5
6 =
0.99till we get value equal to previous value
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 196
STOP
φ2; ( improved orbital)
Are the
values
same ?
[ - ½ ∇12 - ½ ∇2
2 - Zr1
- Zr1
+ ∫ (φ1; )2d τ
r12
] φ2 = E φ2
φ1; ( improved orbital)
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Hartree Fock ‘s theory: Hartree’s method suffers from a drawback that the orbital product
wave function is not antisymmetric. Fock introduced anti symmetrised wave function and
followed the same iterarative procedure. The orbitals obtained are called HFSCF AO ‘s
The antisymmetrised product wave function is expressed as determinant.`
Ψ = 1
√n! φ1(1) φ 1(2) φ2 (3) φ2 (4)... φ ( n)
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 197
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Where φ1(1) is a spin orbital with e1 and α – spinφ 1(2) is the spin orbital with e2 and β –
spin in the same orbital φ1. He introduced Fock’s operator ( F) in place of H to include
electron repulsion and electron exchange.
The Fock operator is defined as F = - ½ ∑ ∇2 - ∑ zr + ∑ [ 2 Ji – Ki]
Ji is called coloumb operator and Ki is called exchange operator
1218 BORN – HEIMER APPROXIMATION
The Schrodinger equation includes both nuclear and electronic motions. To separate
the part of Schrodinger equation due to electronic motion, Max Born and Robert
Oppenheimer assumed that nucleus is assumed to be stationary ,when the electrons move.
This is because nuclei are 1000 times heavier than electrons.The electronic wave function Ψe
(r,R) depends on ‘r’(distance between electrons) as well as ‘R’( distance between nuclei)
and the nuclear function depends ‘R’ only.
Ψ = Ψe (r,R) Ψ(R)
Substituting in Schrodinger equation HΨ = E Ψ, we get
H Ψe (r,R) Ψ(R) = E Ψe (r,R) Ψ(R)
For a molecule consisting N nuclei ( u, v, w....) and n ( i ,j, k.... ) electrons , the
complete Hamiltonian operator is given by
H = nuclear kinetic energy + electronic kinetic energy + nuclear potential energy + nuclear –
electron attraction potential energy + electronic repulsion potential energy.
H = - h2
8π 2 ∑u
N 1mu
∇u2 - h2
8 π 2 ∑i
n 1me
∇e2 +
∑u , v
zu z v e2
( 4 π∈0 ) ruv
+¿∑i ,u
zu e2
( 4 π∈0 ) r iu
+¿∑i , j
e2
( 4π∈0 ) rij
¿¿
Applying BO approximation we can neglect the first term and hence Hamiltonian becomes
H = - h2
2 ∑
i
n 1me
∇e2 + ∑
u , v
zu z v e2
( 4 π∈0 ) ruv
+¿∑i ,u
zu e2
( 4π∈0 ) r iu
+¿∑i , j
e2
( 4 π∈0 ) rij
¿¿
Using this we can solve Schrodinger equation.
1318 VALENCE BOND THEORY FOR HYDROGEN MOLECULE
(HEITLER – LONDON THEORY)
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 198
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Consider the hydrogen molecule is made up of HA and HB. . Let A and B represent the
two H-atoms , 1 and 2 represent the two electrons and S represents the ‘s’ orbital.
Let us assume that electron 1 is associated with atom A and electron 2 is associated with atom B then the wave function of this state is given by Φ1 = SA(1)SB(2) -----------------1
If the electron 1 is associated with atom B and electron 2 is associated with atom A then the wave function of this state is given by Φ2 = SA(2)SB(1) --------------------2
The wave functions of Hydrogen molecule is given by the Linear Combination of Atomic Orbitals( LCAO). which is Ψ = a1 Φ1 + a2 Φ2 where a1 and a2 are normalization constants
Substituting , Ψ = a1 [SA(1)SB(2) ] + a2 [SA(2)SB(1) ] --------------3
To find the normalization constants’a1 ‘ and ‘a2’:
The condition for normalised wave function is
∫−∞
∞
ΨΨ * dτ = 1
∫−∞
∞
{a1[S A (1) S B (2)]+a2[S A (2) SB (1)] } {a1 [ S A (1 ) S B (2 ) ]+a2 [S A (2 ) S B (1 ) ] }dτ = 1
∫−∞
∞
a1 [S A(1)S B(2)]+a2[S A(2)S B(1)]2 dτ = 1
a12 ∫
−∞
∞
[S A(1)S B(2)]¿¿2 dτ + a22 ∫
−∞
∞
[S A(2)S B(1)]¿¿2 dτ + 2 a1 a2
∫−∞
∞
[S A(1)S B(2)]S A (2)S B(1)¿ dτ1 dτ2 = 1
∫−∞
∞
[S A(1)S B(2)] dτ1 = ∫−∞
∞
[S A(2)S B(1)] dτ2 = 1,
∫−∞
∞
[S A(1)S B(2)]S A (2)S B(1)¿ dτ1 dτ2 = S2
Therefore the above equation becomes a12 (1)+ a2
2 (1) + 2 a1 a2 S2 = 1
Since a1 = a2 , a12 + a1
2 + 2 a12 S2 = 1
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 199
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
2a12 + 2 a1
2 S2 = 1
2a12 ( 1 + S2 ) = 1
a12 =
12 (1+S2)
a1 = 1
√2 (1+S2 )
Since a1 = a2 a2 = 1
√2 (1+S2 )
therefore the function becomes
, Ψ = 1
√2 (1+S2 ) [SA(1)SB(2) ] + 1
√2 (1+S2 ) [SA(2)SB(1) ]
, = 1
√2 (1+S2 ) { [SA(1)SB(2) ] + [SA(2)SB(1) ] }
This is for symmetric wave function. For antisymmetric wave function we have
, Ψ = 1
√2 (1+S2 ) { [SA(1)SB(2) ] - [SA(2)SB(1) ] }
There is only one symmetric wave function
A(1)B(2) + B(1) A(2) [ α (1)β (2) - α (2)β (1)]
This is called singlet state because S= 0, 2S+ 1 = 2(0) + 1 = 1
There are three antisymmetric wave functions
A(1)B(2) - B(1) A(2) [ α(1) α (2)]
A(1)B(2) - B(1) A(2) [ β (1) β (2)]
A(1)B(2) - B(1) A(2) [ α(1)β (2) + α (2)β (1)]
This is called triplett state because S= 1, 2S+ 1 = 2(1) + 1 = 3
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 200
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
To find energy:
Variation treatment leads to two secular equations
a1 ( H11 – E) + a2 ( H12 – ES 2 ) = 0
a1 (H21 – ES2 ) + a2 ( H22 – E ) = 0
on solving the 2× 2 determinant, we get
E + = H 11+H 12
2 (1+S2 ) , E - = H 11−H12
2 (1−S2 )
To find H11 and H12:
The Hamiltonian is given by
H = - ½ ∇12 -
1r A 1
- ½ ∇22 -
1rB2
- 1
r A 2 -
1rB 1
+ 1r12
+ 1R
Where 1
r A 1,
1r A 2
, 1
rB1 ,
1rB2
, 1
r12 and
1R represents the distances.
Let HA = - ½ ∇12 -
1r A1
, HB = - ½ ∇22 -
1rB 2
, H’ = - 1
r A2 -
1rB 1
+ 1
r12 +
1R
Solving we get
E + = 2 EH + J+ K
(1+S2 ) + 1R
E - = 2 EH + J−K
(1−S2 ) + 1R
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 201
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
First two terms in the right side constitute electrostatic energy and the third term is nuclear
repulsion energy.
∆ E+ = J+ K
(1+S2 )
It is found out that K is more negative than J. Therefore ∆ E+ is negative for al values of
R. it represents the stable state. ∆ E- is positive representing repulsive state
The ∆ E+ plot shows that two H- atoms attract each other as they approach , passes through
a state of minimum energy and begin to repel when they are very close.The plot ∆ E- never
shows minimum
MO THEORY VB - THEORY
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 202
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
1418 LCAO –MO THEORY FOR DI ATOMIC MOLECULES
LINEAR COMBINATION OF ATOMIC ORBITAL- MOLECULAR ORBITAL
(LCAO-MO)
-TREATMENT OF DIATOMIC MOLECULES
According to LCAO theory, the molecular orbitals are formed by linear
combination of atomic orbitals (AOs) .
HYDROGEN MOLECULE ( H2)
Consider the hydrogen molecule is made up of HA and HB. The wave functions of
Hydrogen molecule is given by the Linear Combination of Atomic Orbitals( LCAO). which
is
Ψ = a1 SA + a2 SB ----------------------------------1
Where SA represents the s- orbital of hydrogen A and SB represents the s- orbital of hydrogen
B.and a1 and a2 are normalization constants.
The secular equations are
a1 ( HAA – ESAA) + a2 ( HAB – ESAB) = 0 e1
e2
a1 (HBA – ESBA ) + a2 ( HBB – ESBB) = 0
The equations have non-trivial solution only if the secular determinant is equal to zero.
HAA – ESAA HAB – ESAB
HBA – ESBA HBB – ESBB 0
Since both electrons are indistinguishable, HAA = HBB
Since H is a Hermitian operator HAB = HBA
SAA = SBB = 1 , SBA = SAB = 0 ( overlap integral)
Substituting in the above determinant,
HAA – E HAB – ES
HAB – ES HAA – E 0
( HAA – E ) 2 = ( HAB – ES ) 2
∴ HAA – E = ± HAB – ES
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 203
H A HB
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Let E = E1 , when positive value is taken, therefore the above equation becomes
HAA – E1 = + HAB – E1S
Rearranging, HAA – HAB = E1 - E1S
= E1 ( 1- S )
∴ E1 = H AA – H AB
(1−S)
Let E = E2 , when negative value is taken, therefore the above equation becomes
HAA – E2 = - ( HAB – E2S)
Rearranging, HAA + HAB = E2 + E2S
= E2 ( 1 + S )
∴ E2 = H AA+– H AB
(1+S )
Thus the energy levels are E1 = H AA – H AB
(1−S),
E2 = H AA+– H AB
(1+S )
To find the normalization constants, let us apply the condition for normalization
∫ΨΨ dt = 1
∫(a1 S A+a2 SB)( a1 SA+a2 SB ) dt=¿¿ 1
∫ ( a1 S A+a2 SB )2dt=¿¿ 1
∫ ( a1 S A )2 dt + ∫ ( a2 SB )2 dt + 2 ∫ a1 SA a2 SB dt=¿¿ 1
a12∫ ( SA )2 dt + a2
2∫ ( SB )2 dt + 2 a1a2∫S A SB dt=¿¿ 1
∫ ( S A )2 dt = 1, ∫ ( SB )2 dt = 1, ∫ SA SB dt=¿¿ S
Therefore the above equation becomes
a12+ a2
2+ 2 a1a2 S = 1
Since both are electrons, a1=a2 = A
A 2 + A2 + 2A2S = 1
2A2 +2A2S = 1
2A2 ( 1 +S) = 1
A2 = 1
2(1+S )
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 204
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
A = 1
√2(1+S¿)¿ substituting in 1, we get
Let Ψ + be the for the symmetric wave function
Ψ+ = 1
√2(1+S¿)¿ SA +1
√2(1+S¿)¿ SB
= 1
√2(1+S¿)¿ ( SA + SB )
Similarly the anti symmetric wave function is given by
Ψ- = 1
√2(1−S¿)¿ ( SA - SB )
1518 POLYATOMIC MOLECULES
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 205
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
1618 CONCEPT OF HYBRIDIZATION
Definition:
Bond formation involves the overlapping of 2s and 2p orbitals .This linear
combination of orbitals of the same atom is called hybridization. Thus hybridization is the
mixing of orbitals to produce equivalent number of orbitals called hybrid orbitals.
A combination of one ‘s’ orbital and one ‘p’ orbital is called ‘sp’ hybridization.
Similarly a combination of one ‘s’ orbital and two ‘p’ orbitals is called ‘sp 2’ hybridization
1. s-p hybridization:
The combination of one s- orbital and one p- orbitals , giving two hybrid orbitals Ψ1 and
Ψ2 may be expressed as
Ψ1 = a1 s + b1 p ----------------1
Ψ2 = a2s + b2p ------------------2
The values of a1,b1, a2 and b2 can be determined by the following considerations.
Ψ1 and Ψ2 are normalized , orthogonal and equivalent.
Since the two hybridized orbitals are equivalent, the share of s functions is equal∴ a12 = a2
2 = ½ -------------------3
a12 = ½
∴ a1 = 1√2
a22 = ½
∴ a2 = 1√2
Ψ1 is normalized
a12 + b1
2 = 1
(12 ) + b1
2 = 1
∴ b12 =
12
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 206
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
b1 = 1√2
Ssince Ψ1 and Ψ2 are orthogonal
a1b1 + a2b2 = 0
(1√2
) ( 1√2
) + ( 1√2
) (b2) = 0
12 + (
1√2
) (b2) = 0
( 1√2
) (b2) = - ½
∴ b2 = - 12 ×
√ 21
= - 1
√2√ 2 ×
√ 21
= 1√2
The wave functions are Ψ1 = 1√2
s + 1√2
p = 1√2
( s+p)
Ψ2 = 1√2
s + −1√2
p = 1√2
( s- p)
Directional characteristics:
Ψ1 = 1√2
( s+p), Ψ2 = 1√2
( s- p)
The angular function of 2s orbital = 1
√ 4 π *
The angular function of 2pz orbital.,l l=1, m=0 = √ 34 π
cos θ **
Substituting Ψ1 = 1√2
(1
√ 4 π+ √ 3
√ 4 π cos θ) = 1
√ 4 π (1+√ 3 cosθ ¿ ¿√2 )
Ψ2 = 1√2
(1
√ 4 π− √ 3
√ 4 π cos θ) = 1
√ 4 π (1−√ 3cosθ ¿ ¿√2 )
The value of maximum in either case is 1+√ 3
√ 2 = 1.932 which is greater than that for pure 2s
orbital(f=1) and a 2p orbital ( √ 3 = 1.732)
The functions are maximum θ = 0, θ = π Therefore the angle between the two functions is 180 o
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 207
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
sp 2 hybridization:
The combination of one s- orbital and two p- orbitals , giving three hybrid orbitals Ψ1 , Ψ2 and Ψ 3 may be expressed as
Ψ1 = a1 s + b1 px + c1 py ----------------1Ψ2 = a2 s + b2 px + c2 py ---------------2 Ψ3 = a3 s + b3 px + c3 py -----------------3
The values of coefficients can be determined by the following considerations.Ψ1 , Ψ2 and Ψ3 are normalized , orthogonal and equivalent. Since the three hybridized orbitals are equivalent, the share of s functions is equal
∴ a12 = a2
2 = a32 =
13 ----------4
a1 = a2 = a3 = 1
√ 3
Let c1 may be assigned to fixed direction. Therefore c1 = 0
To find Ψ1
Since Ψ1 is normalized,
a12 + b1
2 + c12 = 1
(1
√ 3 )2 + b12 = 1
(13 ) + b1
2 = 1
∴ b12 = 1 -
13
= 23
b1 = √23
Thus the wave function is
To find Ψ2
Since Ψ1 and Ψ2 are orthogonal a1a2 + b1 b2 + c1c2 = 0
(1√3
) ( 1√3
) + ( √ 2√3
) b2 = 0
13 + (
√ 2√3
) b2 = 0
( √ 2√3
) b2 = - 13
b2 = −13 ×
√ 3√ 2
= −1
√3 √ 3
∴ b2 = -−1√ 6
Since Ψ2 is normalized a2
2 + b22 + c2
2 = 1
(1
√ 3 )2 +(−1√ 6 ) 2 + c2
2 = 1
(13 ) + (
16 ) + c2
2 = 1
(2+1
6 ) + c22 = 1
(12 ) + c2
2 = 1
∴ c22 = 1 –
c2 = 1√2
Thus the wave function is
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 208
Ψ1 = 1
√ 3 s + √23 px
Ψ2 = 1
√ 3 s - ( 1
√ 6 ) px + 1√2
py
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
To find Ψ3
Since Ψ1 and Ψ3 are orthogonal a1a3 + b1 b3 + c1c3 = 0
(1√3
) ( 1√3
) + ( √ 2√3
) b3 = 0
13 + (
√ 2√3
) b3 = 0
b3 = −13 ×
√ 3√ 2
= −1
√ 3 √ 3 ×
√ 3√ 2
∴ b3 = −1√ 6
Since Ψ2 and Ψ3 are orthogonal a2a3 + b2 b3 + c2c3 = 0
(1√3
) ( 1√3
) +(−1√ 6 )(
−1√ 6 ) +
1√2
c3 = 0
13 +
16 +
1√2
c3 = 0
12 +
1√2
c3 = 0
c3 = −12 ×
√ 21
= −1
√ 2 √ 2 × √ 21
∴ c3 = −1√ 2
Thus the wave function is
Directional characteristics:
Ψ1 = 1
√ 3 s + √23 px
Ψ2 = 1
√ 3 s - ( 1
√ 6 ) px + 1√2
py
Ψ3 = 1
√ 3 s - ( 1
√ 6 ) px - 1√2
py
The angular function of 2s orbital = 1
2 √ π
,
2px orbital. = (√ 3
2√ π sin θ cos φ) and that
of 2py orbital. = ( √ 3
2√ π sin θ sin φ)
Substituting
Ψ1 = 1
√ 3 ( 1
2 √ π¿ + √
23 (
√ 32 √ π sin θ cos
φ)
Ψ2 = 1
√ 3 ( 1
2√ π ) - ( 1
√ 6 ) (√ 3
2√ π sin θ
cos φ) + 1√2
( √ 3
2 √ π sin θ sin φ)
Ψ2 = 1
√ 3 ( 1
2√ π ) - ( 1
√ 6 ) (√ 3
2√ π sin θ
cos φ) - 1√2
( √ 3
2√ π sin θ sin φ)
Let us assume that Ψ1 points towards x-axis. The direction of Ψ2 can be determined as
follows
Ψ2 = 1
√ 3 ( 1
2 √ π ) - ( 1
√ 6 ) (√ 3
2 √ π sin θ cos φ) + 1√2
( √ 3
2√ π sin θ sin φ)
= ( 1
2√ π ) [ 1
√ 3 - ( 1
√ 6 ) (√3 sin θ cos φ) + 1√2
(√3 sin θ sin φ)
If the two functions are in the xy plane , then 𝛉 = 90. Sin 90 = 1., Substituting
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 209
Ψ3 = 1
√ 3 s - ( 1
√ 6 ) px - 1√2
py
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Ψ2 = ( 1
2 √ π ) [ 1
√ 3 - ( 1
√ 6 ) (√3 cos φ) + 1√2
(√3 sin φ)
= ( 1
2 √ π ) [ 1
√ 3 - ( 1
√ 2√ 3 ) (√3 cos φ) + 1√2
(√3 sin φ)
= ( 1
2 √ π ) [ 1
√ 3 - 1
√ 2 cos φ + √ 3√2
sin φ)
Let f = ( 1
√ 3 - 1
√ 2 cos φ + √ 3√2
sin φ)
= ( 1
√ 3 - 1
√ 2 cos φ + √ 3√2
( 1- cos 2φ) ½ )
Let x = cos φ
Then f = ( 1
√ 3 - 1
√ 2 x + √ 3√2
( 1- x2 ) ½
Differentiating with respect to ‘x’
dfdx = -
1√ 2 +
√ 3√2
× ½ ( 1- x2 ) -½ ( -2x)
Put dfdx = 0
0 = - 1
√ 2 + √ 3√2
× ½ ( 1- x2 ) -½ ( -2x)
1
√ 2 = √ 3√2
× ( 1- x2 ) -½ ( - x)
1 = - √3 ( 1 – cos 2 φ) – ½ cos φ
= - √3 ( sin 2 φ) – ½ cos φ
= - √3 1
sin φ cos φ
- 1
√ 3 = cosφsin φ
Taking reciprocal
- √3 = sin φcosφ
Tan φ = - √3
∴ φ = 120
Thus the function f2 is found to be at an angle of 120 o with respect to f1
Similarly the function f3 is found to be at an angle of 240 o with respect to f1
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 210
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Θ l,m = √ 2 l+12
× (l−m ) !( l+m ) !
× Plm(cos θ) ×
1√2 π
e imφ but Plm(cos θ)=
12l× l!
( 1- cos 2 θ ) m/2 (
dd (cosθ)
) l+m [cos 2 θ -1 ) l
*angular function of s orbital (l=0,m=0)
P00 ( cos θ ) =
120× l!
( 1- cos 2 θ ) 0 ( d
d (cosθ) ) 0 [cos 2 θ -1 ) 0 = 1
∴ Θ 0,0 =√ 2(0)+12
×(1)× 1
√2 π = √ 1
2 ×
1√2 π
= 1
√ 4 π
** angular function of p orbital( l=1, m=0)
P10 = ½ (
ddθ ) [cos 2 θ -1 ) l× e0 = ½ [ 2 cosθ ] = cosθ
∴ Θ 1,0 = √ 2(1)+12
× (1) × 1
√2 π = √ 3
2 ×
1√2 π
= 1
√ 4 π cosθ
3.sp3 hybridization:
The combination of one s- orbital and three p- orbitals , giving three hybrid orbitals Ψ1 , Ψ2 Ψ 3 and Ψ 4 may be expressed as
Ψ1 = a1 s + b1 px + c1 py + d1pz ----------------1Ψ2 = a2 s + b2 px + c2 py + d2pz ---------------2 Ψ3 = a3 s + b3 px + c3 py + d3pz -----------------3Ψ4 = a4 s + b4 px + c4 py + d4pz
The values of coefficients can be determined by the following considerations.Ψ1 , Ψ2 , Ψ3 and Ψ 4 are normalized , orthogonal and equivalent. Since the four hybridized orbitals are equivalent, the share of s functions is equal
∴ a12 = a2
2 = a32 = a4
2 = 14 ----------4
a1 = a2 = a3 = a4 = 12
Let c1 may be assigned to fixed direction. Therefore c1 = 0
To find Ψ1
Since Ψ1 is normalized, a1
2 + b12 + c1
2 + d12 = 1
(12 )2 + b1
2 + c12 + d1
2 = 1
14 + b1
2 + c12 + d1
2 = 1
b12 + c1
2 + d12 = 1 -
14
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 211
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
b12 + c1
2 + d12 =
34
----------------------------------5 The first of the four hybrids can be chosen arbitrarily to lie in any direction. let it be along x- direction. along this direction c1 = 0, d1 = 0.
∴ b12 + 0 +0 =
34
b1 = √34
Thus the wave function is
To find Ψ2
Since Ψ1 and Ψ2 are orthogonal a1a2 + b1 b2 + c1c2 + d1d2 = 0
(12 ) (
12) + (
√ 3√4
) b2 + 0 +0 = 0
14 + (
√ 32 ) b2 = 0
( √ 32 ) b2 = -
14
b2 = −14 ×
2√ 3
= −12 √ 3
Since Ψ1 is normalized, a2
2 + b22 + c2
2 + d22 = 1
Since along the xy- plane , the orbital py has no contribution, c2 = 0,
(12 )2 + (
−12√ 3
¿2 + 0 + d22 = 1
14 +
112 + d2
2 = 1
412 + d2
2 = 1
13 + d2
2 = 1
d22 = 1 -
13
= 23
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 212
Ψ1 = 12 s + √3
4 px
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
d2 = √ 23
Thus the wave function is
To find Ψ3
Since Ψ1 and Ψ3 are orthogonal a1a3 + b1 b3 + c1c3 + d1d3 = 0
(12 ) (
12) + (
√ 3√4
) b3 + 0 +0 = 0
14 + (
√ 32 ) b3 = 0
( √ 32 ) b3 = -
14
b3 = - 14 ×
2√ 3
b3 = −12 √ 3
Since Ψ2 and Ψ3 are orthogonal a2a3 + b2 b3 + c2c3 + d2d3 = 0
(12 ) (
12) + (
−12 √ 3 ) (
−12√ 3 ) + 0 + (√
23 )d3 = 0
14 +
112 + (√
23 )d3 = 0
4
12 + (√ 23 )d3 = 0
13 + (√
23 )d3 = 0
d3 = −13 ×
√ 3√ 2
= −1
√ 3 √ 3×
√ 3√ 2
= −1√ 6
Since Ψ3 is normalized, a32 + b3
2 + c32 + d3
2 = 1
(12 )2 + (
−12 √ 3
¿2 + c32 +(
−1√ 6 ) 2 = 1
14 +
112 + c3
2 + 16 = 1
612 + c3
2 = 1
12 + c3
2 = 1, ∴ c3 = √ 12
Thus the wave function is
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 213
Ψ2 = 12 s - (
12 √ 3 ) px +
√ 2√3
pz
Ψ3 = 12 s - ( 1
2 √ 3 ) px + 1√2
py - 1
√ 6 pz
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
To find Ψ4
Since Ψ1 and Ψ4 are orthogonal a1a4 + b1 b4 + c1c4 + d1d4 = 0
(12 ) (
12) + (
√ 3√4
) b4 + 0 +0 = 0
14 + (
√ 32 ) b4 = 0
( √ 32 ) b4 = -
14
b4 = - 14 ×
2√ 3
b4 = −12 √ 3
Since Ψ2 and Ψ4 are orthogonal a2a4 + b2 b4 + c2c4 + d2d4 = 0
(12 ) (
12) + (
−12 √ 3 ) (
−12√ 3 ) + 0 + (√
23 )d4 = 0
14 +
112 + (√
23 )d4 = 0
4
12 + (√ 23 )d4 = 0
13 + (√
23 )d4 = 0
d4 = −13 ×
√ 3√ 2
= −1
√ 3 √ 3×
√ 3√ 2
= −1√ 6
Since Ψ3 and Ψ4 are orthogonal a3a4 + b3 b4 + c3c4 + d3d4 = 0
(12 ) (
12) + (
−12 √ 3 ) (
−12√ 3 ) + (√
12 ) c4 + (
−1√ 6 )(
−1√ 6 ) = 0
14 +
112 + (√
12 ) c4 + (
16 ) = 0
612 + (√
12 ) c4 = 0
12 + (√
12 ) c4 = 0
(√ 12 ) c4 = -
12
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 214
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
c4 = - 12 ×
√ 21
= - 1
√2 √ 2 ×
√ 21
∴ c4 = - 1
√ 2
Thus the wave function is
Thus the wave function of hybrid orbitals are
Ψ1 = 12 s + √
34 px
Ψ2 = 12 s - (
12 √ 3 ) px +
√ 2√3
pz
Ψ3 = 12 s - (
12 √ 3 ) px +
1√2
py - 1
√ 6 pz
Ψ4 = 12 s - (
12 √ 3 ) px -
1√2
py - 1
√ 6 pz
Directional characteristics:
The angular function of 2s orbital = 1
2√ π ,
2px orbital. = (√ 3
2 √ π sin θ cos φ) , 2py orbital. = ( √ 3
2√ π sin θ sin φ) , 2pz orbital = ( √ 3
2 √ π
cos θ), Substituting the values
Ψ1 = 12 (
12√ π ) + √
34 (
√ 32 √ π sin θ cos φ)
Ψ2 = 12 (
12√ π ) - (
12√ 3 ) (
√ 32√ π sin θ cos φ) +
√ 2√3
( √ 3
2√ π cos θ)
Ψ3 = 12 (
12 √ π ) - (
12 √ 3 ) (
√ 32 √ π sin θ cos φ) +
1√2
( √ 3
2 √ π sin θ sin φ) - 1
√ 6 ( √ 3
2√ π
cos θ)
Ψ4 = 12 (
12√ π ) - (
12 √ 3 ) (
√ 32 √ π sin θ cos φ) -
1√2
( √ 3
2 √ π sin θ sin φ) - 1
√ 6 ( √ 3
2 √ π
cos θ)
Let Ψ1 be along the x- axis , the direction of Ψ2 which lies in the xz – plane can be
determined as follows
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 215
Ψ4 = 12 s - ( 1
2 √ 3 ) px - 1√2
py - 1
√ 6 pz
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Ψ2 = 12 (
12√ π ) - (
12√ 3 ) (
√ 32√ π sin θ cos φ) +
√ 2√3
( √ 3
2√ π cos θ)
= (1
2√ π ) [12 - (
12 √ 3 ) (√ 3 sin θ cos φ) +
√ 2√3
√3 cos θ)]
= (1
2√ π ) [ 12 - (
12 sin θ cos φ) + √2cos θ)]
Let f = 12 -
12 sin θ cos φ + √2cos θ]
In the xz- plane φ = 0 for positive lobe and φ = 180 for negative lobe and cos 180 = -1.
Therefore for negative lobe, the above equation becomes f = 12 +
12 sin θ + √2cos θ
Differentiating with respect to ‘θ’
dfdθ =
12 cos θ + √2 ( - sin θ)
Put dfdx = 0
12 cos θ = √2 sin θ
sinθcosθ =
12√ 2
Tan θ = 19 o 28 ‘
Therefore the function f2 makes an angle of 19 o 28 ‘ or 90 + 19 o 28 ‘ = 109 o 28 ‘
1718 HUCKEL THEORY FOR CONJUGATED MOLECULES
:
This is an empirical method for organic compounds containing conjugated carbon
chain linear as well as cyclic. The theory is based on the following assumptions.
1. The wave function of Huckel Molecular Orbital(HMO) is taken as a linear
combination of atomic orbitals(AOs)
Ψi = ai1 p1 + a i2 p2 + ai3p3 +…………….
For example, Ψ1 = a11 p1 + a12 p2 + a13p3 +…………….
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 216
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
2. .There will be ‘n’ energy levels corresponding to ‘n’ HMOs , each being expressed in
terms of α and β
3. Energy is calculated by E = ∫Ψ HΨ dT
∫ΨΨ dT
4. Variation treatment leads to ‘n’ secular equations, where ‘n’ is number of C atoms.
For example for ethylene two secular equations and for butadiene there are four
secular equations.
a1 ( H11 – ES11) + a2 ( H12 – ES12) + …………………….. + an ( H1n – ES1n ) = 0
a1 ( H21 – ES21) + a2 ( H22 – ES22) + ……………………+ an ( H2n– ES2n ) = 0
……………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………..
a1 ( Hn1 – ESn1) + a2 ( Hn2 – ESn2) +…………………… + an ( Hnn – ESnn) = 0
5. He introduce some approximations
a. All integrals of type H ii = α
For example H11 = H22 = H33 = α
b. All integrals of type in which i and j are directly bonded, H ij = β
For example H12 = H21 = β, if C1 and C2 are directly bonded.
c. All integrals of type in which i and j are not directly bonded, H ij = 0
For example H14 = H41 = 0, if C1 and C4 are not directly bonded.
d. Integrals of type S ii = 1
For example S11 = S22 = S33 = 1.
e. Integrals of type S ij = 0
For example S12 = S23 = S34 = 0.
Thus for a linear conjugated chain the secular determinant takes the form
α – E(1) β 0 0
β α – E(1) β 0
0 β α – E(1) β = 0
0 0 β α – E(1)
Dividing by β
α – Eβ 1 0 0
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 217
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
1 α – E
β 1 0
0 1 α – E
β 1 = 0
0 0 1 α – E
β
Put x = α – E
β the above determinant becomes
x 1 0 0
1 x 1 0 = 0
0 1 x 1
0 0 1 x
5. On expanding the n× n determinant, a polynomial of n th degree in x which has ‘n’ real
roots x1,x2,x3….will be obtained.
6. The negative root corresponds to ‘ bonding level’. The positive root corresponds to ‘ anti
bonding level’. When ‘n’ is odd, Ei = α corresponds to ‘non bonding level
7. By inserting the values of E, in the secular equations, the values of HMO coefficients are
obtained.
1. APPLICATION OF HMO TO ETHYLENE:
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 218
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
The skeleton framework of ethylene is C1= C2.
1. Atomic orbitals
Since there are two carbon atoms in ethylene there are two atomic orbitals ( φ1 and
φ2 )
2. Molecular orbitals
The MO may be written as the linear combination of atomic orbitals
Ψ = a1 φ1+ a2 φ2
where a1 and a2 are Huckel’s coefficients
3. The secular equations
Since there are two carbon atoms there will be two secular equations.. They are
a1 ( H11 – ES11) + a2 ( H12 – ES12) = 0
a1 (H21 – ES21 ) + a2 ( H22 – ES22) = 0
4. The secular determinant
secular determinant is formed by leaving the HMO coefficient’s
¿ = 0
5. Apply Huckel’s approximation to find energy equation
H11 = H22 = α, ( Coloumb integral)
H12 = H21 = β ( exchange integral)
S11 = S22 = 1 ,
S21 = S12 = 0 ( overlap integral)
Substituting in the above determinant,
|α−E ββ α−E|=0
dividing by β
α−Eβ 1
1 α−E
β = 0
Put α−E
β = x
This is the energy equation.
6. Solve the secular determinant find the polynomial
x 1
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 219
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
1 x = 0
polynomial is x 2 - 1 = 0
7. To solve the polynomial:
x 2 - 1 = 0
x 2 = 1
x = ± 1
8. Substitute the value in energy
equation.
when x = +1, let E = E1
α−Eβ = x
α−E1
β=+1
α−E 1=β
∴ E1 = α- β
when x = -1, let E = E2
α−E
β = x
α−E2
β = -1
α−E 2=−β
∴ E2 = α + β
Thus the two HMO energies of ethylene are α + β , α – β
The energy level E2 is called bonding HMO( Huckel MolecularOrbital ) because it has lower
energy ( since β is negative ) and E1 is called anti bonding HMO
π – BOND ENERGY:
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 220
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
π – bond energy = total energy – energy in the absence of bonding
= 2(α + β) - 2 α
= 2 β
To determine the HMO co efficients:
a1 ( H11 – ES11) + a2 ( H12 – ES12) = 0
a1 (α- E) + a2 β = 0
since α−E2
β=−1 [Take any one value]
(α- E) = - β [ Take E2 as E]
substituting in equation 1∴ a1 (- β) + a2 β = 0
a1 β = a2 β
a1 = a2
By normalization condition
a12 + a2
2 = 1
a12 + a 1
2 = 1 [a1 = a2 ]
2 a12 = 1
∴ a1 = 1
√ 2 and a2 = 1
√ 2
Thus the wave functions are
Ψ1 = 1
√ 2 φ1+ 1
√ 2 φ2 or = 0.707 φ1+ 0.707 φ2
Ψ2 = 1
√ 2 φ1 - 1
√ 2 φ2 or = 0.707 φ1 - 0.707 φ2
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 221
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
α + β represents bonding energy level because β is negative
The antibonding wave function of ethylene is α – β
The total energy of ethylene in terms of α and β is 2α + 2β
Number of nodal plane in Ψ1 of ethylene is zer0
Number of nodal plane in Ψ2 of ethylene is one
Charge density:
The Charge density is given ρ = 1- qr = 1 – 1 = 0
Π – bond order
This is given by pij = ∑ n( Aij× Bij) Where n is number electrons, Aij –
P12 = 2 × 1
√ 2× 1
√ 2 = 1
Free valency:
For C1: F1 = √3 - P12 = √3 - 1 = 1. 732 -1 = 0. 732
For C1: F2 = √3 - P12 = √3 - 1 = 1. 732 -1 = 0. 732
2 APPLICATION TO BUTADIENE:
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 222
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
The carbon skeleton of butadiene is
C1-C2-C3-C4
There are four AO’s to be combined to form MO’s
Ψ = a1 φ1+ a2 φ2 + a3 φ1+ a4 φ2 -------------------------------1
Where φ1 , φ2, φ3 and φ4 are the atomic orbitals and the secular equations are
a1 ( H11 – ES11) + a2 ( H12 – ES12) + a3 ( H13 – ES14) + a4 ( H14 – ES14 ) = 0
a1 ( H21 – ES21) + a2 ( H22 – ES22) + a3 ( H23– ES23) + a4 ( H24– ES24 ) = 0
a1 ( H31 – ES31) + a2 ( H32 – ES32) + a3 ( H33 – ES33) + a4 ( H34 – ES34) = 0
a1 ( H41 – ES41) + a2 ( H42 – ES42) + a3 ( H43 – ES43) + a4 ( H44 – ES44 ) = 0
1. Hii = Hjj = α, ( Coloumb integral) for example H11 = H22 = α
2. Hij = Hji = β ( exchange integral)
3. Hij = Hji = 0 if there is no direct link between i and j
4. Sii = Sjj = 1 ,
5. Sij = Sji = 0 ( overlap integral)
Using this value, the secular determinant is
α – E(1) β 0 0
β α – E(1) β 0
0 β α – E(1) β = 0
0 0 β α – E(1)
Dividing by β
α – Eβ 1 0 0
1 α – E
β 1 0
0 1 α – E
β 1 = 0
0 0 1 α – E
β
Put x = α – E
β the above determinant becomes
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 223
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
x 1 0 0
1 x 1 0 = 0
0 1 x 1
0 0 1 x
x 1 0 1 1 0
x 1 x 1 - 1 0 x 1 = 0
0 1 x 0 1 x
x { [ x ( x2 -1 ) - 1( x-0) ] } - [ 1 ( x2 – 1) - 1 ( 0)] = 0
x4 – x2 - x 2– x2 +1 = 0
x4 –3 x2 +1 = 0 --------------1
put y = x2 then the above equation becomes,
y2 – 3y + 1 = 0
y = +3 ±√9−42
= +3 ±√52
The roots are y 1 = +3+√52
y 2 = +3−√52
To find x: y1 = x2
∴x2 = +3+√52
= 2¿¿ [ multiplying and dividing by 2]
= 1+5+2√54
= ¿¿
x1 = + 1+√52
= 1. 618
x2 = - 1+√52
= - 1.618
similarly
y 2 = +3−√52
x3 = + 0.618 x 4 = - 0.618
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 224
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
∴ The four roots of equation 1 are x1 = + 1.618, x2 = - 1.618 , x3 = + 0.618 x 4 =
- 0.618
when x = + 1.618 , let energy be E1,
x = α – E
β
1.618 = α – E1
β
E1 = α - 1.618 βwhen x = - 1.618 let energy be E2
then -1.618 = α – E2
β
∴ E2 = α + 1.618 β
when x = + 0.618 let energy be E3,
then, 0.618 = α – E3
β
E3 = α - 0.618 βwhen x = - 0.618 let energy be
E4 , then, 0.618 = α – E3
β
E4 = α + 0.618 β
To determine the HMO co efficients:
a1 ( H11 – ES11) + a2 ( H12 – ES12) + a3 ( H13 – ES14) + a4 ( H14 – ES14 ) = 0
a1 ( H21 – ES21) + a2 ( H22 – ES22) + a3 ( H23– ES23) + a4 ( H24– ES24 ) = 0
a1 ( H31 – ES31) + a2 ( H32 – ES32) + a3 ( H33 – ES33) + a4 ( H34 – ES34) = 0
a1 ( H41 – ES41) + a2 ( H42 – ES42) + a3 ( H43 – ES43) + a4 ( H44 – ES44 ) = 0
the above equations can be rewritten as
a1 (α- E) + a2 β + a3 (0) + a4 (0) = 0 since there is no direct link between 1-3 and 1-4
a1 β + a2 (α- E) + a3 β + a4 (0) = 0
a1 (0) + a2 β + a3 (α- E) + a4 β = 0
a1 (0) + a2 (0) + a3 β + a4 (α- E) = 0
dividing by β, and put x = α – E
β a1x + a2 = 0 a1 + a2x + a3 = 0
a2 + a3x + a4 = 0
a3 + a4 x = 0 By normalization condition
a12 + a2
2 + a32 + a4
2 = 1
put x = -1.618, we will get. a1 = a4 = 0.372 and a2 = a3 = 0.602
Thus the wave function is Ψ1 = 0.372 φ1 + 0.602 φ2 + 0.602 φ2 + 0.372 φ2
put x = -0. 618, we will get, a1 = 0.602, a2 = 0.372, a3 = - 0.372 and a4 =- 0.602
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 225
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Thus the wave function is ,Ψ2 = 0.602 φ1 + 0.372 φ2 - 0.372 φ2 - 0.602 φ2
put x = +0.618, we will get ,a1 = 0.602, a2 = - 0.372, a3 = - 0.372 and a4 =
+0.602
Thus the wave function is ,Ψ2 = 0.602 φ1 - 0.372 φ2 - 0.372 φ2 + 0.602 φ2
put x = +1.618, we will get , a1 = 0.372 , a2 = - 0.602, a3 = + 0.602 and a4 = -
0.372
Thus the wave function is ,Ψ2 = 0.372 φ1 - 0.602 φ2 + 0.602 φ2 - 0.372 φ2
WAVE FUNCTIONS:
Number of nodal plane in Ψ1 of butadiene is zero
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 226
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
3 APPLICATION OF HMO TO BENZENE
The HMO wave function for benzene is Ψ1 = a1 p1 + a2 p2 + a3p3 + a4p4 + a5p5 + a6p6
the secular equations in terms of ‘x’ are
a1x + a2 +a6 = 0
a1 + a2x + a3 = 0
a2 + a3x + a4 = 0
a3+a4x+ a5 = 0
a4+a5x+ a6 = 0
a1 +a5 + a6x =0
The corresponding determinant is
x 1 0 0 0 1
1 x 1 0 0 0
0 1 x 1 0 0
0 0 1 x 1 0
0 0 0 1 x 1
1 0 0 0 1 x
Expanding of this polynomial will lead to x6 – 6 x4 +9x2 -4 = 0
put y = x2, the above equation becomes y3 -6y2+9y-4 = 0
put y = 1, 1-6+9-4 =0 ∴ (y -1)is a factor
y=1 ia a root. To find the other roots 1 1 -6 9 -4 0 1 -5 4 -------------------------------- 1 -5 4 0
The equation becomes y2 – 5y +4 = 0
( y-4)( y-1) = 0
y= 4 and y = 1
y = 1, y=1 and y = 4∴ x2 = 1, x2 = 1 and x2 = 4
x= ± 1, x= ±1 and x = ±2
Therefore the six roots are +1, +1, -1,-1,+2,-2
When x1 = -2, E1 = α +2β bonding
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 227
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
When x2 = -1, E2 = α +β degenerate bonding
When x3 = -1, E3 = α +β
When x4 = +1, E4 = α –β degenerate non- bonding
When x5 = +1, E5 = α -β
When x6 = +2, E6 = α -2β non-bonding
ALITER:
Expression for energy
E = α + 2 β Cos ( 2 πrN ) Where N – number of π electrons, r = 0,1,2…N
For benzene N = 6
When r = 0
E1 = α + 2 β Cos (0)
= α + 2 β (1) [cos (0) = 1 ]
= α + 2 β
When r = 1
E2 = α + 2 β Cos (2 π6 )
= α + 2 β Cos (60) [ π= 180 ]
= α + 2 β (12 ) [cos (60) = ½
= α + β
When r = 2
E2 = α + 2 β Cos (4 π6 )
= α + 2 β Cos (120) [ π= 180 ]
= α + 2 β ( - 12 ) [cos (120) = -
½
= α - β
When r = 3
E3 = α + 2 β Cos (6 π6 )
= α + 2 β Cos (π) [ π= 180 ]
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 228
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
= α + 2 β (-1 ) [cos (π ) = -1
= α - 2β
When r = 4
E3 = α + 2 β Cos (8 π6 )
= α + 2 β Cos (240) [ π= 180 ]
= α + 2 β (-½ ) [cos ( 240 ) =-
½
= α - β
When r = 5
E3 = α + 2 β Cos (10 π
6 )
= α + 2 β Cos (300) [ π= 180 ]
= α + 2 β (½ ) [cos (300 ) =½
= α + β
Thus the energy levels are
α +2β , α + β , α + β , α - β, α - β , α -2β
E1, E2 and E3 levels corresponds to bonding MOs. Two of these energy levels are
degenerate.
The 6 electrons of benzene occupy these bonding MOs of low energy. E4, E5 and E6 levels
corresponds to anti bonding MOs .Two of these energy levels are also degenerate.
Total energy = 2 (α +2β) + 2 (α +β) + 2(α +β)
= 6α +8β
Since benzene has 3 double bonds the total energy of benzene should be equal to 3 times that
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 229
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
of compound ‘having one’ double bond∴ Expected energy of benzene = 3 (energy of ethylene)
= 3(2α + 2β) [ energy of ethylene = 2α
+ 2β]
= 6α + 6β)
Difference in energy = 6α +8β - 3 [2α +2β]
= 2β
This is due to delocalization of π electrons and this energy is known as delocalization
energy.
The value of β is –75 KJ/ mol. Therefore delocalization energy of benzene = –150 KJ/mol.
(36 Kcal/mol) This leads to stability of benzene.
.
The wave functions are
1818 SEMI EMPRICAL METHODS
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 230
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
In HFSCF method, large number of integrals need to be evaluated. For example, even in a small molecule like CH4, we have to evaluate 1035 two electron integrals. Hence semi empirical methods with drastic approximations have been developed.
1. Neglect of Valence Electron: In this method all inner shell electrons are ignored. For example in C,N, O only 2s 2p atomic orbitals are considered. This is effected by replacing the nuclear charge Zp by effective nuclear charge Z’p in the Hamiltonian operator. Hamiltonian H =
The Fock operator =
2. Zero Differential Overlap ( ZDO) : Any product of atomic orbitals within an integral is zero if they are different. Φ μa ×φ μb = 0 if μa ≠ μb Here μa and μb refer to atomic orbitals of atomic centre Aand B.This condition is known as Zero Differential Overlap ( ZDO) condition.
3. Neglect of Diatomic Differential Overlap. (NDDO) In this scheme All overlap integrals, in which μa ≠ μb and all 2-electron integrals are taken as zero.
∫ μa (1 ) μb (1 ) 1r12
μa (2 ) μb (2 )dt 1dt 2 = 0
This is known as Neglect of Diatomic Differential Overlap. (NDDO)
4. Intermediate Neglect od Differential Overlap ( INDO) In this scheme S μa μb = 0 if μa ≠ μb S μa μb = 0
∫ μa μbdτ = 0
This is known as Intermediate Neglect od Differential Overlap ( INDO)5. Complete Neglect of Differential Overlap ( CNDO)
In this scheme Both Overlap integral and non-coloumbic integral are zero.
S μa μb = 0 if μa ≠ μb and This is known as Complete Neglect of Differential Overlap ( CNDO)Hartree – Fock –Roothan (HFR) method
.
ASSIGNMENT- 1 Class : II. M.Sc DATE :
SUB: PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY –III UNIT I: THERMODYNAMICS –I
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 231
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
PART – A ( 2 marks)
1. What are partial molar quantities?
2. Define chemical potential.
3. Define partial molar enthalpy.
4. List three partial molar quantities with their mathematical representation
5. What is fugacity?
6. Differentiate activity and activity coefficient.
7. What are non-ideal solutions?
8. What are dilute solutions?
9. Define excess functions.
10. List out any four excess functions
PART – C( 5marks)
1. Show that the rate of change of chemical potential of a constituent ‘i’ with pressure , at
constant temperature and composition is equal to the partial molar volume of ‘i’ .
2.Variation of chemical potential of a component ‘i; with temperature, at constant pressure
and composition is equal to partial molar entropy of ‘i’. – Prove.
3. The partial molar volume of alcohol in a mixture of alcohol and water is 45.5 ml, nA =
2.0 mol, nB = 2.0 mol . Find the partial molar volume of water if the total volume of the
mixture is 101.5
PART- C (10 marks)
1. Explain how fugacity of a real gas experimentally determined?
2 Arrive the expression to determine the variation of activity with temperature.
3. What do you mean by partial molar volume. How is it determined ?
4 Discuss the variation of fugacity with temperature and pressure.
5. a. How is activity and activity coefficients of a non-electrolyte determined?
b. Write note on Choice of Standard states.
*******
ASSIGNMENT- 2Class : II. M.Sc DATE :SUB: PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY –III UNIT II: SPECROSCOPY – 1
.1. What is rotational spectra?2. Which shows micro wave spectra : CO, CO2, O2, HCN, OCS, H2, CCl4, 3. Give the expression for the energy levels of non- rigid rotator.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 232
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
4. Write down the selection rule for micro wave spectra.5. In what way rigid rotator differs from non- rigid rotator?6. What are symmetric top molecules?7. List some examples for assymetric top molecules.8. Point out the limitations of micro wave spectra9. What is degeneracy of rotational level ?10. How do hot bands differ from overtones?11. .What are combination bands?12. How does Raman scattering differ from Rayleigh scattering?13. .Give the Condition for Raman activity14. .Define polarisability.15. Explain the micro wave spectra of non – rigid rotator16. Discuss the micro wave spectra of poly atomic molecules17. Show that the frequency separation of micro wave spectrum is twice that of rotational
constant.18. .Deduce an expression for the potential energy of a vibrating molecule.19. Sketch the potential energy curve of a vibrating molecule under
1. Simple harmonic .2. Anharmonic.20. .Arrive the expression for fundamental and overtones21. .Explain the origin of P and R branches using diatomic vibrator.22..Discuss Fermi resonance phenomena occurring CO2 molecule.23. .Explain the classical theory of Raman effect.24. .Show that the spectral lines on Rotational Raman spectra are separated by 4B .25.Explain how inter nuclear distance distances in poly atomic molecules determined?26.Derive the expression for energy of rotational level and show that the rotational lines are equally spaced.17. The pure rotational spectrum of CO consists of a series of equally spaced lines separated by 3. 8 cm -1. Calculate the inter nuclear distance of the molecule. reduced mass = 1.07 × 10 -26 Kg
ASSIGNMENT- 3 Class : II. M.Sc DATE :SUB: PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY –III UNIT III: SPECROSCOPY – III
PART-B (2 marks)1. What is zeemann effect?2. What is hyper fine inter action?3. What is Doppler effect?4. Define isomer shift
PART – C ( 5 marks)
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 233
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
1. Derive the expression for the equation of motion of spin in magnetic fields2. Define chemical shift. Discuss the factors affecting chemical shift.3. Explain spin – spin coupling in NMR4. Discuss the NMR of AX and AMX type molecules.5. Write note on 13C NMR.6. Explain the fragmentation pattern for simple aliphatic and aromatic alkanes7. Write down Mc – Connel relation and discuss its application.8. Explain the principle behind the Mass spectroscopic technique.9. . With neat diagram explain the components of mass spectrometer10. Write note on McLaffetry rearrangement11. . Discuss the fragmentation pattern of alkanes.12. Explain the fragmentation pattern of . aromatic hydrocarbon 13. Write note on a. parent peak b. base peak c. isotopic peak 14. Account for the following peaks at the m/ei. . – in toluene ii . -------in methanol iii. –in 2-butanone
iv. – in toluene v. benzaldehyde.15. Mass spectra of 1-butanal gives peaks at the following m/e values.
Show the fragmentation pattern that explains these observations.16. The molecular ion peak at an m/e value of -. Assign a structure that would be expected to
give rise to the above peak.17. How will you distinguish 2- pentanone and 3- pentanone using Mass Spectral
studies. Draw the mass spectrum of the fragments formed.
. PART – D ( 10 marks)1. Discuss briefly about 31 P NMR and 19 F NMR2. Write a brief account of FT-NMR3. Discuss the principle behind ESR4. Discuss the fragmentation pattern for alcohols, aldehydes and ketones.5. Write note on electron-neutron hyperfine interactions. 6. Discuss briefly about Quadrupole interactions and Magnetic interactions7. Discuss the theory and instrumentation of Mass spectra
ASSIGNMENT- 5
Class : II. M.Sc DATE :
SUB: PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY –III UNIT V : QUANTUM CHEMISTRY –
IV
:
PART – A
1. Identify the perturbation term in the Hamiltonian of Helium atom 2. Mention the conditions to apply perturbation theory 3. Identify H0 and H1 of an oscillator governed by potential energy V = ½ kx2 + ax3 + bx
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 234
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
4. A hydrogen atom subjected to electric field has Hamiltonian H = - 12 ∇2 -
2r1
+rcosθ
.Separate the perturbed part from unperturbed part.5. Write down the second order perturbed Schrodinger wave equation 6. What is the need for approximation methods?7. List out the steps followed in variation method.8. Give two examples for perturbation9. In what way variation method differs from perturbation method.10. Write down the expression for first order perturbation energy and wave function11. Find the term symbol for N.12. .Verify whether an energy state with term symbol 2P 5/2 can exist13. Deduce the atomic term symbol for boron.14. Determine the electronic configuration of the element whose ground state term symbol is4S
3/2.
15. The term symbol of a particular atomic state is 6S5/2. Suggest a possible electronic configuration
16. . What is screening constant?.17. . Calculate the screening constant of 2s electron of Carbon
20. Differentiate Slater type orbitals and Hydrogen like orbitals. 21. What are Slater type orbitals?22.Determine the effective nuclear charge of 1s electron in F.23. What is Born – Heimer approximation ?25. Write down the Hamiltonian for Hydrogen molecule
26.Write the Hamiltonian for helium atom and mention the terms involved.
27. What are resonance and coulomb integrals?
28.What are exchange integrals?
29. What are the three important approximations of Huckel LCAO-MO theory?30. What do you mean by hybridization?.31..Mention the degenerate energy levels of benzene in terms of α and β32. Give the expression for wave function and energy of ethylene in terms of α∧β.
33. Write down the secular determinant for H2 molecule. 34. Write down the Secular determinant for the He atom35. Write down the secular determinant of benzene in terms of α∧β
36. Give the expression for wave functions of H2 molecule by VB theory.37. Draw the wave functions of butadiene
PART- B (5 marks )
1. Discuss the application of perturbation theorem to Hydrogen atom.2. Derive the expression for first order perturbation energy and wave function.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 235
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
3. Arrive the secular equation using variation theorem.4. Discuss the application of variation theorem to hydrogen atom.5. Show that the variation method provides an upper bound to the ground state energy of the
system.
6. The average energy of H –atom in terms of variation parameter ’a’ is ( a2
6 -
a2 ) . Find the
variation parameter and the true energy
7..For the selected wave function Ψ = r e−ar the expectation value of energy is E=α2
6 -
α2 .
Find the value of 𝛂 and hence calculate the energy8. Find the expression for STO for 2s, orbital in Nitrogen atom.. The normalisation constant is ‘N’. Compare with Hydrogen – like orbital.9.. What do you mean by Effective nuclear charge. Calculate the Effective nuclear charge of
2s electron of Nitrogen and Calcium11. Write note on HFSCF method12. Explain Born-Oppenheimer approximation13. Outline the salient features of VB(Heitler-London) theory as applied to Hydrogen molecule14 Apply HMO theory for ethylene molecule and determine its energy and wave function . 15.Give the assumptions of Huckel molecular orbital theory
16. Use 2s and 2pz atomic orbitals to construct two equivalent sp hybrid orbitals and determine the angle between the hybrid orbitals.
PART- C ( 10 marks )
1.Show that the first order perturbation energy for a non-degenerate system is just the perturbation function averaged over the corresponding unperturbed state of the system. Derive the expression for the eigen function of the perturbed system2. Discuss the first order perturbation theory for a non –degenerate level .Using this theory, solve the Schrodinger wave equation for ground state of Helium and obtain the expression for eigen energy3.A Hydrogen atom is exposed to an electric field of strength F so that its perturbed
Hamiltonian is F r cosθ. Show that there is no first order effect. Given Ψ 0¿ = e−r
√ π and
∫0
∞
e−2 r r3 dr = 384. Apply variation method to Helium atom and calculate its ground state energy. Compare your result with that obtained from perturbation method.9. Consider Ψ as a linear combination of two eigen functions φ1 and φ 2 with normalization
constant a1 and a2 respectively. Find the expectation value of energy and show that it is lesser than the lowest energy E0
12.The expectation energy of H-atom were calculated as a2
6 -
a2 and
3a2 - 2√ 2 a
π when the
wave functions are Ψ = re−ar and Ψ = e−ar 2
respectively.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 236
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
a. Minimize this average energy and find the variation parameter ‘a’ b. Find the actual energyc. Which is better wave function ?. Comment your result
13 Explain VB theory for H2 molecule considering Ψ as a linear combination of two eigen functions φ1 and φ 2 with normalization constant a1 and a2 respectively
14. Write down the secular equations and set up the secular determinant for butadiene . Determine the energies of the HMOs in terms of 𝛂 and 𝛃 and calculate the free valencies of the terminal carbons.
15.Give the secular equations for benzene . Calculate the energies and HMO coefficients Determine its π- bond order
16. Write note on Semi Empirical methods.
R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE ,CHENGALPATTU -603001DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY
MODEL EXAM OCT 2014Class : II. M.Sc DATE:SUB: PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY – III MAX. MARK : 75
PART – A answer any ten questions ( 1 × 10 = 10 )
1. The fugacity of a pure gas is 20 atm and the same gas in a mixture is 40 atm . Calculate
the activity of the gas.
2. Define partial molar properties.
3. What is Fermi resonance?
4. Give the selection rule for electronic spectra.
5. Define spin – spin coupling.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 237
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
6. An NMR signal for a compound is found to be 180 Hz downward from TMS peak using a spectrometer operating at 60 MHz. Calculate its chemical shift.
7. Calculate the ionic strength of 0.1M of BaCl2.
8. What is mean ionic activity ?
9. List out the steps followed in variation method.
10. Write down the expression for first order perturbation energy and wave function.
11. Write down the secular determinant for hexa triene.
12. . What are Slater type orbitals?
PART – B answer any five questions ( 5 × 5 = 25 )
13. What is chemical potential? Discuss the variation of chemical potential with temperature and pressure.
14. Derive Gibbs – Duhem- Margus equation
15. Discuss the various types of transitions in organic compounds
16. What is Zeemann effect? Explain.
17. Explain Debye-Huckel limiting law
18. Apply first order perturbation result to calculate the ground state energy of Helium
19. Determine energy and wave function of ethylene .Calculate its free valency, charge density and π- bond order.
PART – C answer any four questions ( 10× 4 = 40 )
20. a. Derive the expression to show the variation of fugacity with temperature and pressure.b. Calculate the free energy change accompanying the compression of one mole of a gas at 27 o C, from 20 to 200 atm. The fugacitities at 20 and 200 atm pressure are 50 and 100 atm respectively
c. Write a note on choice of standard states
20. a. Explain the principle behindRaman spectra
b. The bond length of NO molecule is 1.151 × 10 -10 m. Calculate the frequency in cm -1
for the pure rotational levels in the spectrum of NO corresponding to the following
changes in the rotational quantum number 0 →1, 1 →2 , and 2→ 3
22. a. Explain Fourier transform spectroscopy
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 238
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
b. An AX type spectrum has 4 lines δ = 4.8, 4.7 , 1.1 and 1.0 ppm measured from TMS with an NMR spectrometer operating at 100 MHz. Estimate the spin – spin coupling constant and chemical shift.
23. a. Discuss about Debye-Huckel theory of strong electrolytes. b. How is Debye Huckel Bronsted equation verified?
24. Use the trial wave function Ψ = e−arto find the energy eigen values for the ground state of H- atom using variation theorem. Hamiltonian in spherical co-ordinates is
H =−12r 2
ddr
¿) - 1r [given ∫
0
∞
e−2 ar r2dr = 1
4 a3 ∫0
∞
e−2 arr dr = 1
4 a2]
1. Write down the secular equations and set up the secular determinant for butadiene
and Determine the energies of the HMOs in terms of 𝛂 and 𝛃 and calculate the free
valencies of the terminal carbons.
**************
R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE ,CHENGALPATTU -603001DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY MODEL EXAM OCT 2016
CLASS : II M.SC MER3C - PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY - III MARK : 75DATE : 19.10.2016 DURATION : 3 HRS
PART – A ( 10 × 1 = 10) 1. Define chemical potential 2.. What is fugacity 3. How does Raman scattering differ from Rayleigh scattering.? 4. How do hot bands differ from overtones? 5. Define isomer shift 6. An NMR signal for a compound is found to be 180 Hz downward from TMS peak using a spectrometer operating at 60 MHz. Calculate its chemical shift. 7. Write down Nernst equation 8. Define Galvanic cell. 9. What is screening constant. Calculate the screening constant of 2s electron of Carbon 10. Differentiate Slater type orbitals and Hydrogen like orbitals.11. What is hybridization?12. Differentiate base peak and molecular ion peak
PART – B (5 × 5 = 25) [ Answer any five]13. Show that the variation of chemical potential with pressure is equal to partial molar Volume.14. Explain the classical theory of Raman effect.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 239
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
15. Write note on Mc – Lafeerty rearrangement 16 Calculate the magnetic field strength required to observe the NMR lines for fluorine at 60 MHz. given gN for Flourine is 5.3 and nuclear magneton (uN) = 5 × 10 27 J/T17. How is activity coefficient determined by emf method ?18. Discuss the application of perturbation theorem to Hydrogen atom.19. Apply HMO theory to butadiene and arrive the expression for its wave functions
PART – C ( 4 × 10 = 40 ) [ Answer any four]20.a. Discuss the variation of fugacity with temperature and pressure. b. Derive Gibbs Dugam Margus equation21a. Explain the origin of P,Q and R branches using diatomic vibrator. b. The pure rotational spectrum of CN consists of a series of equally spaced lines separated by 3.8 cm -1. Calculate the inter nuclear distance of the molecule. reduced mass = 1.07 × 10 -26 Kg22. Explain hyperfine splitting 23 Derive Debye Huckel limiting law. 24.a. Discuss the application of variation theorem to Hydrogen atom. b. Derive the expression for first order perturbation energy and wave function25. Write note on a Choice of standard state b. Fourier transform spectroscopy
*************R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE ,CHENGALPATTU -603001
DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY MODEL EXAM OCT 2019
CLASS : II M.SC MER3C - PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY - III MARK : 75DATE : --.10.2019 DURATION : 3 HRS
PART – A ( 10 × 1 = 10) 1. Define chemical potential 2.. What is fugacity 3. How does Raman scattering differ from Rayleigh scattering.? 4. How do hot bands differ from overtones? 5. What is Mc-Lefferty rearrangement? 6.. Define base peak in Mass spectra. 7. Write down Nernst equation 8. Define Galvanic cell. 9. What is screening constant. Calculate the screening constant of 2s electron of Carbon 10. Differentiate Slater type orbitals and Hydrogen like orbitals.11. What is hybridization?12. Differentiate base peak and molecular ion peak
PART – B (5 × 5 = 25) [ Answer any five]13. Show that the variation of chemical potential with pressure is equal to partial molar Volume.14. Explain the classical theory of Raman effect.15. Write note on Zemann effect. 16 Explain the hyperfine splitting pattern of methyl radical.17. How is activity coefficient determined by emf method ?
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 240
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
18. Discuss the application of perturbation theorem to Hydrogen atom.19. Apply HMO theory to butadiene and arrive the expression for its wave functions
PART – C ( 4 × 10 = 40 ) [ Answer any four]20.a. Discuss the variation of fugacity with temperature and pressure. b. How is fugacity of a gas determined21a. Explain the origin of P,Q and R branches using diatomic vibrator. b. The pure rotational spectrum of CN consists of a series of equally spaced lines separated by 3.8 cm -1. Calculate the inter nuclear distance of the molecule. reduced mass = 1.07 × 10 -26 Kg22. Explain the following
a. 13C NMR b. Doppler effect c. Fragmentation of alcohols 23 Derive Debye Huckel limiting law. 24.a. Discuss the application of variation theorem to Helium atom. b. Derive the expression for first order perturbation energy and wave function25. Write note on a Choice of standard state b. Fourier transform spectroscopy
*************
Calculate the magnetic field strength required to observe the NMR lines for fluorine at 60 MHz. given nuclear g- factor (gN ) for flourine is 5.3 and nuclear magneton (uN) = 5 × 10 - 27 J/T
Solution:
From Bohr frequency condition, hϑ = μN gN Bz
Bz = , hϑ
μ N g N
= , ( 6 .626× 10−34 ) ×60× 106
5.3× 5× 10−27
. = 39.756 × 10−27 ,26.5 ×10−27
= 1.5 T
Calculate the NMR frequency of a proton in the magnetic field of 1.5 T given that nuclear g- factor (gN ) is 5.3 and nuclear magneton (uN) = 5 × 10 - 27 J/T
Solution:
From Bohr frequency condition, hϑ = μN gN Bz
ϑ = μ N g N B z ,
h
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 241
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
= .5.3×5× 10−27 ,× 1.56 .626 × 10−34
. = 39.75× 10−27 ,6.626 × 10−34
= 6 × 10 7 Hz
= 60 MHz
Find the value of nuclear magneton (uN )
Solution:
nuclear magneton (uN ) = eh
4 π m p
= 1.602×10−19× 6.626 × 10−34
4× 3.141× 1.67 ×10−27
= 10.61× 10−53
20.98× 10−27
= 5.05 ×10−27 J/T
UNIT – I – THERMODYNAMICS CODE: 43211234
MARKS : 13,14,15,16,20,22,23 25,26,29 (10 × 3 = 30) Others 1 mark each (20 × 1 =
20 )
DATE : 10 -08-2020 TIME : 1.30 pm -2.00 pm
1. The term partial molar property is applicable to
I. open system II . closed system III isolated system
a. I and III only b. II and III only
c. III only d. I only
2 . Variation in property with change in number of moles at constant T and P is called
a. ideal property b. real property
c. partial molar property d. entropy
3. Chemical potential is
a. partial molar internal energy b. Partial Molar Free Energy
c. partial molar enthalpy d. partial molar volume
4. Which represents chemical potential ?
a. (∂ G∂ n 1
) T, P, n2,n3... b. (∂ H∂ n 1
) T, P, n2,n3
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 242
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
c. ∂ S
∂ n1¿ T, P, n2,n3 d. (
∂ U∂ n 1
) T, P, n2,n3
5. Variation of chemical potential with temperature is equal to
a. partial molar entropy b. partial molar internal energy
c. Partial Molar Free Energy d. partial molar volume
6. When temperature increases, chemical potential
a. increases b. decreases.
c. remains same d. not predicable
7. Chemical potential of a solid at its melting point is X. The chemical potential of its
liquid is
a. greater than X b. lesser than X
c. equal to X d. twice of X
8.Chemical potential of a liquid at its boiling point is Y. Then the chemical potential of its
vapour is
a. greater than Y b. lesser than Y
c. twice of Y d. equal to Y
9. Variation of chemical potential with pressure is equal to
a. partial molar internal energy b. partial molar entropy
c. Partial Molar Free Energy d. partial molar volume
10. Gibbs –Duhem equation is
a. ∑ ¿dGi= 0 b ∑ μi dGi= 0
c. ∑ ¿dμi= 0 d. ∑ μi dni= 0
11. Which is true ?
a. molar volume is additive but partial molar volume is not additive
b. molar volume is not additive but partial molar volume is additive
c. both molar volume and partial molar volume is not additive
d. both molar volume and partial molar volume is additive
12. The partial molar volume of NaCl solution and water are 49.5 and 48.5 respectively.
The total volume of the mixture when one mole of each is mixed is
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 243
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
a. equal to 98 b. lesser than 98
c. greater than 98 d. equal to 1.0
13. The partial molar volume of alcohol in a mixture containing one mole of alcohol and
one mole of water is 50 ml, Find the partial molar volume of water if the total volume of
the mixture is 101
a. 51 b. 60
c. 20 d.100
14.The partial molar volume of alcohol and water in a mixture of alcohol and water is 40
ml and 20 ml respectively. If, the mixture contains 2 moles of each find the total volume of
the mixture
a. 51 b. 120
c. 20 d.100
15. Partial molar volume of ethanol and water is 53 .1 ml and 16. 9 ml respectively Find the
volume of mixing when one mole of each is mixed. Total volume of pure components before
mixing is 72 ml
a. +2 b. -12
c. -2 d. -7
16. The variation of chemical potential of a solid with temperature is shown below.
Find the chemical potential of the compound in the liquid state at its melting point
a. 0.2 b. 0.5
c. -2 d. 0.3
17. Which is true ?
I. ( ∂ μ∂ P ) T,n1,n2.. = (
∂ V∂ n
) T, P II. ( ∂ μ∂ P ) T,n1,n2. = V III . ( ∂ μ
∂ T ) P,N = - (∂ S∂ n
) T, P
a. I only b. II only
c. III only d. all the three
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 244
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
18. ( ∂ μ∂ T )P , N is equal to
a. V b. S
c. - S d. G
19. The Relation between fugacity and free energy change is given by
a. ∆ G = nT ln(d ln f ) b. ∆ G = nRT (d ln f )
c. ∆ f = nR ln (d ln G ) d. ∆ f = nRT ln (d lnG )
20 In the determination of fugacity by graphical method the area under the curve of α
versus P is 83.14 units: Find the fugacity of N2 at 100 K and 10 atm pressure e−0.1 = 0.9048
a. 9.048 b. 90.48
c. 904.8 d. 0.301
21. For an ideal binary mixture which is true ?
I.∆ V mix = 0 II. ∆ Hmix = 0 III. ∆ Gmix = RT ∑ x i ln x i IV. ∆ Gmix = 0
a. I ,II and III only b. I and III only
c. II and III only d. I ,II and IV only
22. The fugacity of a pure hydrogen gas was found to be is 25 atm and the when it is mixed
with argon it increases to 50 atm . Calculate the activity of the gas.
a. 70 b. 2
c. 90 d. 25
23.The fugacity of a pure gas is 10 atm and the same gas in a mixture is 20 atm Calculate the
activity coefficient of the gas at 20 atm pressure
a. 70 b. 0. 2
c. 0.1 d. 20
24. In rational system the composition is expressed in
a. molarity b. molality
c. normality d. mole fraction
25. In the determination of activity for non-electrolytes by Nernst distribution law CS2
(A)and H2O (B) were used. Plot of mA
mB against mB gave a straight line which on
extrapolating to zero concentration. gave 0.2 and if the activity of B is 20 what is the
activity of the component A.
a. 20 b. 0. 2
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 245
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
c. 0.1 d. 4
26. The following graph shows the determination of activity for non-electrolytes by Nernst
distribution law
If the activity of B is 50 what is the activity of the component A.
a. 20 b. 0. 2
c. 2.5 d. 4
27. Departure from ideal behavior (𝛂) is determined using the formula
a. α = RTP |+ V b. α =
RTP – V
c. α = RTV – P d. α =
RP – V
28. ASSERTION(A) The standard sate of real gas can be fixed in terms of fugacity.
REASON ( R) Fugacities of real gases can be measured
a. Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation
b. A is correct and R is wrong
c. A is correct and R is not the correct explanation
d. Both A and R are wrong
29.. Match the following
1 (X) real mixture - (X) ideal mixture A Variation of chemical potential with pressure
2 p1 = x1 × p0 B Roault’s law
3 RT ∑ x i ln x i C Excess function
4 ( ∂ V∂ n
) T, P D Free energy change of mixing
5 ( ∂ S∂ n
¿ T, P E Decrease of chemical potential
with temperature
a. 1-C,2-B,3-D,4-A, 5-E
b. 1-C,2-D,3-B,4-E 5-A
c. 1-E,2-D,3-C,4-B, 5-A
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 246
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
d. 1-A ,2-B,3-C,4-D, 5-E
30 .Which is not true ?
a. Fugacity in pure state multiplied with activity gives fugacity of mixture
b. For gases fugacity corresponding to one Kelvin is taken as standard state .
c. In practical system of standard state composition is expressed in molarity
d. The ratio between activity and pressure of the real gas is called activity coefficient.
*****************
KEY
13. The partial molar volume of alcohol in a mixture containing one mole of alcohol and
one mole of water is 50 ml, Find the partial molar volume of water if the total volume of
the mixture is 101
V B = V−nA V A
nB
= 101 – (1 )(50)
1
= 51
14.The partial molar volume of alcohol and water in a mixture of alcohol and water is 40
ml and 20 ml respectively. If, the mixture contains 2 moles of each find the total volume of
the mixture
V = nA V A + nB V B
= 2 (20) + 2 (40 )
= 120
15. Partial molar volume of ethanol and water is 53 .1 ml and 16. 9 ml respectively Find the
volume of mixing when one mole of each is mixed. Total volume of pure components before
mixing is 72 ml
volume of mixing = ( 53 .1 + 16. 9) – 72
= -12
16. The variation of chemical potential of a solid with temperature is shown below.
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 247
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Find the chemical potential of the compound in the liquid state at its melting point
chemical potential of the compound in the liquid state at its melting point = 0.3
20 In the determination of fugacity by graphical method the area under the curve of α
versus P is 83.14 units: Find the fugacity of N2 at 100 K and 10 atm pressure e−0.1 = 0.9048
ln fp = -
1RT × area under the curve
= - 1
8.314×100 × 83.14
= - 0.1
taking exponential f = p × e−0.1
= 100 × 0.9048
= 9.048
22. The fugacity of a pure hydrogen gas was found to be is 25 atm and the when it is mixed
with argon it increases to 50 atm . Calculate the activity of the gas.
Activity = 5025
= 2
23.The fugacity of a pure gas is 10 atm and the same gas in a mixture is 20 atm Calculate the
activity coefficient of the gas at 20 atm pressure
Activity = 2010
= 2
activity coefficient = ap
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 248
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
= 2
20
= 0.1
25. In the determination of activity for non-electrolytes by Nernst distribution law CS2
(A)and H2O (B) were used. Plot of mA
mB against mB gave a straight line which on
extrapolating to zero concentration. gave 0.2 and if the activity of B is 20 what is the
activity of the component A.
aA = aB × limmB → 0
mA
mB
= 20 × 0.2 = 0.4 26. The following graph shows the determination of activity for non-electrolytes by Nernst
distribution law
If the activity of B is 50 what is the activity of the component A
aA = aB × limmB → 0
mA
mB
= 50 × 0.5 = 2.5 .
UNIT – 3 – SPECTROSCOPY - 3 CODE: 43211234
MARKS : 100 [ Each caries 1 mark except mentioned ] DURATION : 60 mts
DATE : 24 -08-2020 TIME : 9.30 pm -10.30
pm
1. Which is not resonance spectra?
a. NMR b. ESR
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 249
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
c. NQR d. Mossbauer
2. Zeemann effect is splitting a spectral line into several components by
a. Electric field b. increasing intensity
c. Magnetic field d. Internal pressure
3. Which is not true?
a. Normal Zeeman effect is due to interaction between external magnetic field and
orbital magnetic moment
b. Anomalous Zeeman effect is due to interaction between external electric field and
Combined orbital and intrinsic magnetic moment
c. Normal Zeeman effect is observed when the spin is zero
d. Only nine transitions consistent with the selection rule for l = 1 to l= 2
4. Number of allowed transitions from the energy level l = 1 to l= 2 is
a. 9 b. 5
c.4 d.12
5.The energy levels corresponding to the j value 1 and 2 are split into – number of levels
respectively
a. 3, 5 b. 5,4
c.4,8 d.12,8
6. Zeeman effect splits the energy state P1/2 and P3/2 in to --- number of states
a. 3, 5 b. 2,4
c.4,8 d.12,8
7. Number of transition allowed from the energy level P3/2 to S1/2 is
a. 9 b. 6
c.4 d.12
8. Number of transition allowed from the energy level P1/2 to S1/2 is
a. 9 b. 6
c.8 d.4
9.Transition of electrons from the energy level P3/2 to S1/2, when magnetic field is applied
is
a. Normal Zeeman effect b. Stark effect
c. Inverse Zeeman effect d. Anomalous Zeeman effect
10.The compound which has high value of chemical shift ( in )
a. CH3Cl b. CH3I
c. CH3F d. CH3Br
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 250
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
11.Deshielding of proton in CH3F is more than that of CH3I. this is because
a. Fluorine is small atom b. Fluorine has high electronegativity
c. Fluorine is a gas d. Fluorine does not form oxy acid
12.Which is most deshielded?
a. CHCl3 b.CH3Cl
c. CH2Cl2 d. CH4
13. Anisotropic induced magnetic field effects are found in
I. alkane II. alkene III alkyne
a. II and III only b. II only c III only d. I and III only
14. Chemical shift value of ethane was 0.86 but that of ethylene is 5.25.This is due to
a. Hydrogen bonding b. Anisotropic
c. Inductive effect d. Electromeric effect 15.Which is not true in 13C –NMR
I . Chemical shift ranges from 0 – 10 ppm II. 100 % natural abundance
III. Coupling is significance
a. I only b. II only
c. III only d. II and III only
16.In FTNMR, spectrum is presented in
a. time domain b. velocity domain
c. position domain d. frequency domain
17. In FTNMR
a. frequency domain converted into time domain
b. time domain is converted into amplitude domain
c. amplitude domain is converted into time domain
d. time domain is converted into frequency domain
18.The reference compound for 19F NMR spectroscopy is
a. CCl3F b. CH2F2
c.. CHF3 d. CF4
19. The number of NMR signals in Methyl cyclopropane
a. 1 b.3
c. 2 d.4
20 Which is not true ?
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 251
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
a. In PMR chemical shift ranges from 0 – 100 ppm while in CMR it ranges from 0- 10
ppm
b. In PMR coupling between H-H is more abundant while in CMR it is ignored
c. PMR gives high intense lines while CMR gives low intense peak
d. In PMR 100 % natural abundance while in CMR it is only 1.1 %
21. The PMR signal in 1,1,2- trichloroethane contains [ 4 marks]
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 252
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
a. doublet( 2H) , triplet(1H) b.doublet(1H) , triplet(2H)
c. doublet(2H) , triplet(3H) d. quartett(2H) , triplet(1H)
22.A compound has MF C2H6O. Its PMR is given below.
The compound could be [ 4 marks]
a. Ethanol b. acetone
c propanone d. ethyl methyl ketone
23.Which one of these spectra corresponds to that of CHCl2CH2Cl [ 4 marks]
24.The compound with MF C5H12 which shows one PMR signal is [ 4 marks]
a. ethyl iso propyl ketone b. 2, 2- dimethyl butane
c 2- methyl butane d. 2, 2- dimethyl propane
25. Match the following?[ [ 4 marks]
1 CH3CH3 A Doublet, multiplet
2 CH3CH2Cl B Singlet, quartet triplet
3 Cl-CH2-O -CH2-CH3 C Triplet, quartet
4 CH3-CH- CH3
CH3
D singlet
a. 1-A ,2-B,3-C,4-D b. 1-D,2-B,3-C,4-A
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 253
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
c. 1-C,2-D,3-B,4-A d.1-D,2-C,3-B,4-A
26. Match the following?[ 4 marks]
compound Number of NMR signals
1 1-Chloro propane A 1
2 Ethoxy acetic acid, B 2
3 1,1 dibromo ethane C 3
4 1,2 dibromoethane D 4
a. 1-A ,2-B,3-C,4-D b. 1-C,2-B,3-D,4-A
c. 1-C,2-D,3-B,4-A d.1-C,2- D,3-A,4-B
27. A compound shows a proton NMR peak at 300 Hz downfield from TMS peak in a
spectrometer operating at 100 MHz. the chemical shift of the compound is ?[ 4 marks]
a. 9 ppm b. 3ppm
c.8 ppm d.4 ppm
28.Which shows one NMR signal? [ 4 marks]
a. propanone b. Ethyl chloride
c. Methanol d. 1-Chloro propane
29. The compound does not show two NMR signals is[ 4 marks]
a. ethyl benzene, b. iso butylene
b. 1,1 dibromo ethane d. 2- chloro propane
30. A compound shows a proton NMR peak at 300 Hz downfield from TMS peak in a
spectrometer with chemical shift of 3pp. .The operating frequency of the spectrometer is [ 4
marks]
a. 50 MHz b.100 MHz
c. 2 MHz d.4 MHz
31. An NMR spectrum obtained from a spectrometer operated at 500 MHz shows peaks at 0.864
and 0.849 ppm find the coupling constant[ 4 marks]
a. 50 Hz b.100 Hz
c. 7.5Hz d.4 Hz
32. An NMR spectrum obtained from a spectrometer operated at 500 MHz shows peaks at 3.585,
3.568 and 3.55ppm Find the coupling constant[ 4 marks]
a. 50 Hz b.100 Hz
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 254
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
c. 7.5Hz d. 8.5 Hz
33. An NMR spectrum obtained from a spectrometer operated at 500 MHz shows peaks at
2. 837, 2.808, 2.825 and 2,796 ppm Find the coupling constants[ 4 marks]
a. 50,7.5 Hz b.100, 2.5 Hz
c. 7.5, 69 Hz d.14.5,6 Hz
34. The compound which shows three NMR signals is [ 4 marks]
I. 1-Chloro propane II. iso propanol III diethyl succinate
a.I only b. II only c I,II,III d. III only
35.. Which has multiplet in nmr? [ 4 marks]
I. benzene II. iso butylene III. 2-chloro propane
a. I only b. III only
c II only d. I and II only
36. The spectrum of isopropyl chloride shows[ 4 marks]
a. doublet, multiplet b. doublet, doublet
c. triplet, quartet d. doublet
37. The spectrum of CH3-CH2-O- COOH shows[ 4 marks]
a. triplet, quartet, singlet b. triplet, doublet,multiplet
c. triplet, quartet, doublet d. quartet, triplet,multiplet
38.. A triplet and a quartet appears in [ 4 marks]
I. benzene II ethyl chloride III 2-chloro propylene
a. I only b. II only
c III only d. I,II
39. The compound showing one PMR signal with MF C8H18 [ 4 marks]
a. ethyl benzene, b. 2- iso propyl pentane
c. 2,2,3,3 – tetramethyl butane d. 2- ethyl hexane
40.. The organic compound with MF C5 H12 shows the following NMR signals. Triplet δ =
0.98 ( 6H) , sextet t δ = 1.28 (4H), pentet t δ = 1.28(2H) [ 4 marks]
a. 2-ethyl propane b. 3- methyl butane
c. 2,2,-dimethyl propane d. n – pentane
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 255
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
KEY
19.
22 . Establish the structure of the following compounds showing one PMR signal C2H6O
Solution:
Only one signal shows all 6 hydrogens should have same environment
24. Establish the structure of the following compounds showing one PMR signal C5H12
Solution:
Only one signal shows all 12 hydrogens should have same environment
2,2 – Dimethyl propane
26. number of signals
30. A compound shows a proton NMR peak at 300 Hz downfield from TMS peak in a
spectrometer with chemical shift of 3pp. . Find the operating frequency
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 256
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Solution:
Chemical shift = 300
x×106 ×106
3 = 300
x×106 ×106
X = 100 MHz
31. An NMR spectrum obtained from a spectrometer operated at 500 MHz shows peaks at
0.864 and 0.849 ppm find the coupling constant
Solution:
J =( 0.864 – 0.849 )× 500
= 0.15 × 500
= 7.5 Hz
32. An NMR spectrum obtained from a spectrometer operated at 500 MHz shows peaks at
3.585, 3.568 and 3.55ppm Find the coupling constant
Solution:
J =( 3.585 – 3.568 )× 500
= 0.017 × 500
= 8.5 Hz
33. An NMR spectrum obtained from a spectrometer operated at 500 MHz shows peaks at
2. 837, 2.808, 2.825 and 2,796 ppm Find the coupling constant
Solution:
J1 =( 2.837 – 2.808 )× 500
= 0.029 × 500
= 14.5 Hz
J2 =( 2.837 – 2.825 )× 500
= 0.012 × 500
= 6 Hz
34. The compound which shows three NMR signals is
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 257
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
35.Which has multiplet in nmr?
I. benzene II. iso butylene III. 2-chloro propylene
36. The spectrum of isopropyl chloride shows
37. The spectrum of CH3-CH2-O- COOH shows
38.. A triplet and a quartet appears in
I. benzene II ethyl chloride III 2-chloro propylene
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 258
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
39. Establish the structure of the following compounds showing one PMR signal
C8H18,
Solution:
DBE = C+1- H2
= 9 – 9
= 0
Only one signal shows all 18 hydrogens should have same environment
2,2,3,3 – tetramethyl butane
40.. The organic compound with MF C5 H12 shows the following NMR signals. Triplet δ =
0.98 ( 6H) , sextet t δ = 1.28 (4H), pentet t δ = 1.28(2H)
Solution:
1. Triplet 6H shows there should be a carbon containing 3 H-atom having a
neighbour CH2 or CH – CH - CH
2. CH3 – CH2 – CH3
3. Pentet (2 H) shows there should be carbon having a neighbour with 4. CH2 – C- CH2
5. Sextet t δ = 1.28 (4H), shows CH2 – C- CH3
Therefore the structure could be CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – CH2 –CH3
n – pentane
UNIT – 3 – ESR SPECTRA CODE: 43211234
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 259
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
MARKS : (12+ 8 = 20 ) [ Each caries 1 mark except mentioned ] DURATION : 20
mts
DATE : 31 -08 -2020 TIME : 9.30 pm -10.00
pm
This paper contains 14 questions
1.Which is not true in ESR?
I. It is an absorption spectra. II. Absorption is in Ultra Violet region
II. Spectra is shown only by paramagnetic substances
a. I only b. I and II only c. I and III only d. II only
2.The magnetic energy of interaction is given by
a. E = gBMs b. E = βBMs
c.. E = gβBMs d. E = gβB
3.The number of hyperfine lines in Deuterium atom is
a. 1 b. 3
c.. 2 d. 4
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 260
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
4. Absorption region in ESR spectroscopy is
a. microwave region b. radio wave region
c. γ-ray region d. X-ray region
5. ESR is observed in ,
I. free radicals, II. triple state molecules III. Diamagnetic molecules
a. I and II only b. II and III only
c. III only d. I and III only
6.. The selection rule in ESR is
a. ∆MI = ±1 ,∆Ms = ± 1 b. ∆MI = 0 ,∆Ms = ± 1
c. ∆ MI = 0 ,∆ Ms = 0 d. ∆MI = ±1 ,∆Ms = ± 2
7 . McConnell relation is
a. AH = Q CH b. A H =eh
4 π mc
c. AH = ρ Q CH d. g = hϑβ B
8. Chemical structure of the standard used in ESR is
9..Match the following ions with number of ESR lines [ 2 marks]
1 1.4-Benzoquinone radical anion A 7
2 Naphthalene ion B 75
3 Antracene ion C 25
4 Radical anion of benzene D 5
5 Deuterium E 3
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 261
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
a. 1-A ,2-B,3-C,4-D, 5-E b. 1-D,2-B,3-C,4-A,5-E
c. 1-C,2-D,3-B,4-A,5-E d.1-D,2-C,3-B,4-D,5-E
10. The separation between the lines in the ESR spectra of methyl radical was found to be
23 gauss and if Q= 500 G the electron density on carbon is [ 2 marks]
a. 50% b. 75%
c.. 86.4% d. 95.5 %
11.The spin density of benzene is 22.5 G .It shows a septet with coupling constant 3.75 G
The time at which the electron spend on each carbon atom is [ 2 marks]
a. 50% b. 15.8 %
c.. 26% d. 95. %
12.Match the following atom/ ions with number of ESR lines [ 2 marks]
1 H-atom A 7
2 CH2 radical B 4
3 CH3 radical C 3
4 Radical anion of benzene D 2
a. 1-D,2-C,3-B,4-A b. 1-D,2-B,3-C,4-A,
c. 1-C,2-D,3-B,4-A, d. 1-A ,2-B,3-C,4-D,
13. Which is not true?
a. In ESR absorption region is radio wave while in NMR absorption region is
microwave
b. ESR arises due to spinning of electron about nucleus. NMR arises due to interaction
between proton and magnetic field
c. ESR Spectra is shown only by compounds having unpaired electron while NMR
Spectra is shown by all compounds
d. No Chemical shift in ESR while in NMR there occurs chemical shift
14.The standard used in ESR is
a. 1,2-diphenyl-1-picrylhydrazyl radical b. 2,2-diphenyl-1-picrylhydrazyl radical
c. 1,1-diphenyl-2-picrylhydrazyl radical d. 2,2-diphenyl-3-picrylhydrazyl radical
15. Number of unpaired electrons per gram in DPPH is
a.0 .53 × 102 0 b. 2 .53 × 101 2
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 262
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
c. 1.53 × 1021 d. 1 .53 × 1013
16. Number of line in benzene solution of DPPH is
a. 2 b. 3
c. 4 d.5
key
Number of ESR lines
benzo quinone radical = ( 2nI + 1 )
2(4) ( ½ ) + 1 = 5
Naphthalene ion
Number of lines = ( 2nIi + 1 ) ( 2mIj +1 ).
Naphthalene ion has two sets of 4 equivalent protons each.
Number of lines = ( 2) (4) ( ½ )+ 1 )× ( 2) (4) ( ½ )+ 1 )
= 25 ?
Anthracene ion
It has 3 sets of equivalent protons . Set α and β contains 4 equivalent protons each and set γ
contains 2 equivalent protons
Number of lines = [ ( 2) (4) ( ½ )+ 1 )] ×[( 2) (4) ( ½ )+ 1)] × [ ( 2) (2) ( ½ )+ 1]
= 75 lines ?
Radical anion of benzene
The number of hyperfine lines in C6H5 radical = 2(6) ( ½ ) + 1
= 7
The number of hyperfine lines in D atom = 2(2) ( ½ ) + 1
= 3
2. The separation between the lines in the ESR spectra of methyl radical was found to be 23
gauss and if Q= 500 G the electron density on carbon is
The separation between the lines (A) is found to be 23 gauss
Applying McConnell relation
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 263
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
ρ = AQ
= 23
500
= 0.046
= 4.6 %
Electron density on carbon = 100- 3(4.6 )
= 100 - 13. 8
= 86.4 %
3.The spin density of benzene is 22.5 G .It shows a septet with coupling constant 3.75 G
The time at which the electron spend on each carbon atom is
standard value of Q= 22.5 G ( gauss)
Shows a septet with coupling constant 3.75 G
ρ = AQ
= 3.7522.5
= 0.0076
There are 6 hydrogens with this electron density making a total of
6×0.0076 = 0.046
= 5%
The remaining 95 % of electron’s time is spent equally on the 6 carbon atoms
On each carbon = 956
= 15.8
4. The number of hyperfine lines in H atom = 2(1) ( ½ ) + 1
= 2 The number of hyperfine lines in CH2 radical = 2(2) ( ½ ) + 1 = 3 The number of hyperfine lines in CH3 radical = 2(3) ( ½ ) + 1
= 4
Radical anion of benzene
The number of hyperfine lines in C6H5 radical = 2(6) ( ½ ) + 1
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 264
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
= 7
UNIT – 3 – MASS SPECTRA CODE: 43211234
MARKS : [9+ 44 ] 53 [ Each caries 1 mark except mentioned ] DURATION : 60
mts
DATE : 07-09-2020 TIME : 9.30 pm -10.30
pm
This paper contains 20 questions
1. McLafferty rearrangement takes place in
I. 3-methylbutramide II. pentanoic acid III. butanal
a. II and III only b. II only
c III only d. I , II and III
2. Necessary requirement for the occurrence of McLafferty rearrangement is that the
compound must have
I. 𝛄- H atom II. unsaturation III at least one co ordinate bond
a. II and III only b. II only
c I and II only d. I and III only
3. CH3CH2CH2CHO undergoes McLafferty rearrangement. One of the product formed
could be
a. propene b. ethene
c. ethyne d. propanone
4. Pentanoic acid undergoes McLafferty rearrangement. One of the peak could have been
appeared at m/e value[ 4 marks]
a. 60 b. 28
c. 26 d. 15
5. 3-Methylbutyramide undergoes McLafferty rearrangement. One of the peak could have been
appeared at m/e value[ 4 marks]
a. 59 b. 28
c. 26 d. 15
6. The mass spectra of a compound [ MWt = 72] shows peak at 44 [ CH2CHOH] with the
elimination of ethylene molecule .The compound could be [ 4 marks]
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 265
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
a. 3-Methylbutyramide b. Butanal
c. pentanoic acid d. butanol
7. Which is not true in McLafferty rearrangement?
a. It involves the cleavage of a β - bond followed by a γ - hydrogen transfer
b. The rearrangement leads to elimination of neutral molecules
c. It takes place only in aldehydes
d. It takes place through a six membered transition state.
8.The MR ion formed in 2- hexanone corresponds to the m/e is [ 4 marks]
a.59 b. 28
c. 26 d. 58
9.The MR ion formed in 1- pentene [ 4 marks]
a. CH3CH b. CH2CHCH2
c. CHCH d. CH3CHCH2
10 The MR ion formed in n-propyl benzene corresponds to the m/e is [ 4 marks]
a. 59 b. 28
c. 92 d. 58
11.The MR ion formed in methyl-n- propyl ketone [ 4 marks]
a. CH3COH b. CH3COHCH2
c. CHCOH d. CH3CH2COHCH2
12.Double MR is found in
a. CH3 CH2CH2 CO CH2CH2CH3 b. CH3 CH2 CO CH2CH2CH3
c. CH3 CO CH2CH2CH2CH3 d.CH3 CO CH2CH2CH2CH3
13. Double MR in 4- heptanone corresponds to the m/e is [ 4 marks]
a.58 b. 28
c. 26 d. 68
14.Match the following?[ [ 4 marks]
compound m/e of MR ion
1 . Butanal A 42
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 266
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
2 Pentanoic acid B 59
3 3-Methylbutyramide C 60
4 2- hexanone D 44
5 1- pentene E 58
a.1-A ,2-B,3-C,4-D, 5-E b. 1-D,2-C,3-B,4-E , 5-A
c. 1-C,2-D,3-B,4-A , 5-E d.1-D,2-C,3-B,4-A, 5-E
15.Match the following?[ [ 4 marks]
compound MR ion
1 4- heptanone A CH3CHCH2
2 methyl-(1-phenyl propyl) ketone B C6H5CH2
3 n-propyl benzene C CH3COHCH3
4 1- pentene D CH3COHCH2
a.1-A ,2-B,3-C,4-D, b. 1-D,2-C,3-B,4-E ,
c. 1-C,2-D,3-B,4-A , d.1-D,2-C,3-B,4-A,
16. The ionised reagent not used in Mass Spectra is
a. methane b. ammonia
c. isobutene. d. chloroform
17.The radius of the curvature of the different ions in mass spectrometer is related with (me
¿
as
a. r2 = 2 mB2e
b. r2= EmB2e
c. r2 = 2EB2e
d. r2 = 2 EmB2 e
18. ASSERTION(A): Chemical ionization technique is preferred to Electron impact
technique
RESAON ( R) : Electron impact technique will not produce molecular ion peak
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 267
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
a. A is correct but R is wrong
b. Both A and R are wrong
c. A is correct and R is the correct explanation for A
d. A is correct and R is not the correct explanation for A
19. Which is not true?
a. In chemical ionization the observed m/e value is one unit more than the true molecular
weight.
b. In positive ion CI spectra molecule is decomposed
c. Methane is an ionised reagent gas
d. Electron ionization gives rise to fragment ions
20 Which is not true?
a. In Dempster’s mass spectrometer Ions with larger me follow a path with greater
radius.
b. positive ion CI spectra molecule gets protonated
c. Electron impact technique will not produce molecular ion peak
d. Mass spectra is recorded with intensities of the signals against mass values.
Key
1. McLafferty rearrangement takes place in 3-methylbutramide pentanoic acid .
butanal[ all the 3 compounds ]
2. Necessary requirement for the occurrence of McLafferty rearrangement is that the
compound must have 𝛄- H atom and unsaturation
3. . CH3CH2CH2CHO undergoes McLafferty rearrangement. One of the product formed
could be
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 268
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Ans : ethene
4 Pentanoic acid undergoes McLafferty rearrangement. One of the peak could have been
appeared at m/e value[ 4 marks]
Solution :
Ans = 60
5. 3-Methylbutyramide undergoes McLafferty rearrangement. One of the peak could have
been appeared at m/e value[ 4 marks]
Peak at = 101- 42= 59
6: The mass spectra of a compound [ MWt = 72] shows peak at 44 [ CH2CHOH] with the
elimination of ethylene molecule .The compound could be
Solution :
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 269
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Mol.wt = 48 + 8+16 = 72
The compound is Butanal
7. McLafferty rearrangement
a. It involves the cleavage of a β - bond followed by a γ - hydrogen transfer
b. The rearrangement leads to elimination of neutral molecules
c. It takes place through a six membered transition state.
8.The MR ion formed in 2- hexanone is
9.The MR ion formed in 1- pentene
10.The MR ion formed in n-propyl benzene
11. The MR ion formed in methyl-(1-phenyl propyl) ketone
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 270
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
12. Double MR is found in 4- heptanone[ CH3 CH2CH2 CO CH2CH2CH3]
13. . Double MR in 4- heptanone
Match the following?[ [ 4 marks]
compound m/e of MR ion
1 . Butanal A 42
2 Pentanoic acid B 59
3 3-Methylbutyramide C 60
4 2- hexanone D 44
5 1- pentene E 58
b. 1-D,2-C,3-B,4-E , 5-A
15.Match the following?[ [ 4 marks]
compound MR ion
1 4- heptanone A CH3CHCH2
2 methyl-(1-phenyl propyl) ketone B C6H5CH2
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 271
FOR 2020 - PG-3- PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
3 n-propyl benzene C CH3COHCH3
4 1- pentene D CH3COHCH2
c. 1-C,2-D,3-B,4-A ,
C.SEBASTIAN, AP / CHEM. R.V.GOVT.ARTS COLLEGE,CHENGAIPATTU MOB: 9444040115 Page 272